Volvo VHD Operator`s manual

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
vhd,vn
Volvo Trucks. Driving Success.
R
calprop.fm Page 1 Tuesday, July 8, 2008 9:09 AM
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and other
reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and other related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and other reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
IMPORTANT
Your new Volvo truck contains many new technological advancements
that may require new servicing techniques and methods. An authorized
Volvo truck dealer is in the best position to provide technicians who
have the necessary training, experience and tools to properly service
your truck.
© Volvo Group North America, Inc. 2008
VN,VHDcover.fm Page i Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:46 AM
VN, VHD SERIES
OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS HANDBOOK IS
CURRENT AT TIME OF PUBLICATION.
© Volvo Group North America, Inc. 2008
i
VN,VHDcover.fm Page ii Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:46 AM
NOTES
ii
VN,VHDcover.fm Page iii Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:46 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . 59
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . 411
METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
iii
VN,VHDcover.fm Page iv Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:46 AM
NOTES
iv
vn-vhd.bk Page 1 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVISORY LABEL DEFINITIONS
(IN HANDBOOK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INFORMATION FOR THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
EMISSIONS CONTROL COMPLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
VEHICLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SERVICE LITERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SERVICE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
EVENT DATA RECORDING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1
vn-vhd.bk Page 2 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
ADVISORY LABEL DEFINITIONS (IN HANDBOOK)
Cautionary signal words (Danger-Warning-Caution) may appear in
various locations throughout this manual. Information accented by one
of these signal words must be observed to minimize the risk of
personal injury to service personnel, or the possibility of improper
service methods which may damage the vehicle or cause it to be
unsafe. Additional Notes and Service Hints are used to emphasize
areas of procedural importance and provide suggestions for ease of
repair. The following definitions indicate the use of these advisory
labels as they appear throughout the manual:
Danger indicates an unsafe practice that could
result in death or serious personal injury. Serious
personal injury is considered to be permanent
injury from which full recovery is NOT expected,
resulting in a change in life style.
Warning indicates an unsafe practice that could
result in personal injury. Personal injury means
that the injury is of a temporary nature and that full
recovery is expected.
Caution indicates an unsafe practice that could result
in damage to the product.
2
vn-vhd.bk Page 3 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Note indicates a procedure, practice, or condition that
must be followed in order for the vehicle or component
to function in the manner intended.
A helpful suggestion that will make it quicker and/or
easier to perform a procedure, while possibly reducing
service cost.
3
vn-vhd.bk Page 4 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
INFORMATION FOR THE OWNER
If there are questions on the maintenance and performance of your
vehicle, please discuss them with your Volvo Truck dealer. Your
authorized dealer is required to have trained mechanics, special tools
and spare parts to fully service your vehicle. If necessary, your dealer
will contact the manufacturer for any assistance.
In addition to this operator's manual, there may be additional
instruction/operator's manuals supplied by component manufacturers.
These manuals are placed in the Owner's Package and placed in the
cab. Be sure to read all the manuals thoroughly before operating the
vehicle.
Various safety labels may be placed about the components by the
component manufacturer. Be sure to read and follow these labels to
prevent damage to the vehicle, personal injury or death.
Information in this manual refers to Volvo components and Volvo
drivetrain. There is also certain information regarding the Cummins
engine. For detailed information on the Cummins engine or non-Volvo
engines and/or drivetrains, contact the respective manufacturer.
Establish a Preventive Maintenance Program with the help of your local
Volvo Truck dealer. A Preventive Maintenance Program makes it
possible to maximize the amount of time your vehicle is up and
running, resulting in longer component life. This makes for a safer
vehicle by reducing any mechanical failures due to poor maintenance
practices.
Various truck warranty coverage plans, contingent on application and
weight class, are available. Please contact an authorized Volvo Truck
dealer for complete details. Replacement warranty certificates for Volvo
Trucks are available from authorized Volvo dealers.
4
vn-vhd.bk Page 5 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
For trucks placed in service after October, 2002 and operating in the
USA, Mexico and Canada, Volvo dealers can order copies of the
Standard Truck Warranty Certificate and the Premium (Purchased)
Truck Coverage Certificate. Warranty Certificate copies and Operator
Manuals are available in either English, Spanish or French. Contact
your authorized Volvo Truck dealer for more information.
Federal law requires manufacturers to notify owners of
its products in the event of a non-compliance to a
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard or if a
safety-related defect is discovered. If you are not the
original owner of this vehicle, please notify us about
the change in ownership at the address below or
through an authorized Volvo Truck dealer. This is the
only way we will be able to contact you if necessary.
Volvo Trucks North America
Attn: Vehicle Registration Dept.
P.O. Box 26115
Greensboro, NC 27402-6115
United States of America
5
vn-vhd.bk Page 6 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
DO NOT Remove this operator's manual from the vehicle. It contains
important operational and safety information that is needed by all
drivers and owners of this vehicle.
Illustrations in this manual are used for reference
only and may differ slightly from the actual
vehicle; however, key components addressed in
the manual are represented as accurately as
possible.
This manual covers Volvo VN and VHD series vehicles manufactured
by Volvo Trucks North America with any of the following designations:
앫
VNL 780
앫
VNL 730
앫
VNL 670
앫
VNL 630
앫
VNL 430
앫
VNL 300 (Daycab)
앫
VNM 630
앫
VNM 430
앫
VNM 200 (Daycab) Roof fairing choice is optional.
앫
VHD 200B (Axle Back)
앫
VHD 200F (Axle Forward)
앫
VHD 430 (Axle Back)
앫
VHD 430 (Axle Forward)
6
vn-vhd.bk Page 7 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
L = long hood, M = medium hood
7
vn-vhd.bk Page 8 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
EMISSIONS CONTROL COMPLIANCE
Exhaust and Noise Emissions
General
USA
The Federal Clean Air Act, Section 203 (a) (3), states the following
concerning the removal of air pollution control devices or modification
of a certified engine to a non-certified configuration:
“The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited:
(3) For any person to remove or render inoperative any device or
element of design installed on or in a motor vehicle or motor vehicle
engine in compliance with regulations under this part prior to its sale
and delivery to the ultimate purchaser, or for any manufacturer or
dealer knowingly to remove or render inoperative any such design after
sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser.”
Specifically, please note that no person may make such changes prior
to the sale and delivery of the vehicle to the ultimate purchaser, and, in
addition, no manufacturer or dealer may take such action after sale and
delivery of the vehicle to the ultimate purchaser. The law provides a
penalty of up to $10,000 for each violation.
Canada
The same conditions that apply in the USA apply to Canada, with one
exception. After the vehicle is sold to a retail customer, that is, the end
user, the jurisdiction controlling the emission control devices becomes
the province in which the vehicle is licensed. No changes should be
made that render any or all of the devices inoperative.
If the owner/operator wishes to make changes to the emission control
devices, check with the provincial authority before changes are made.
8
vn-vhd.bk Page 9 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Mexico
The same conditions that apply in the USA apply to Mexico. Refer to
the Mexican Federal Law for Emission Control which adheres to EPA
regulations. No changes should be made that render any or all of the
emissions control devices inoperative.
If the owner/operator wishes to make changes to the emission control
devices, check with the state authority before changes are made.
CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS WARRANTY
Warranty coverage is subject to change without notice.
Contact your Volvo Truck dealer for the current
warranty statement.
The California Air Resources Board and Volvo Trucks North
America are pleased to explain the California emission control
system warranty on your new motor vehicle engine. In California, new
motor vehicle engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet
the State’s stringent anti-smog standards. Volvo Trucks North America
must warrant the emission control system on your engine for the period
of time listed below provided there has been no abuse, neglect, or
improper maintenance of your engine.
Your emission control system may include parts such as the
fuel-injection system, turbocharger assembly, electronic control module
and other emission-related assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, Volvo Trucks North America will
repair your engine at no cost to you including diagnosis, parts, and
labor.
MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE:
If an emission-related part of your engine is defective, the part will be
repaired or replaced by Volvo Trucks North America. This is your
emission control system DEFECTS WARRANTY.
9
vn-vhd.bk Page 10 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES:
As the motor vehicle engine owner, you are responsible for the
performance of the required maintenance listed in this manual. Volvo
Trucks North America recommends that you retain all receipts covering
maintenance of your vehicle, but Volvo Trucks North America cannot
deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for your failure to ensure
the performance of all scheduled maintenance listed in other manuals
which were supplied with your vehicle.
You are responsible for presenting your motor vehicle engine to a
VOLVO dealer as soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable amount of time, not to exceed
30 days.
As the motor vehicle engine owner, you should also be aware that
Volvo Trucks North America may deny you warranty coverage if your
vehicle or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper
maintenance, or unapproved modifications.
If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and
responsibilities, you should contact the Volvo Trucks North America
Warranty Department at P. O. Box 26115, Greensboro,
NC 27402-6115, or the California Air Resources Board at 9480 Telstar
Avenue, El Monte, California 91731.
(Applicable only to vehicles and/or engines certified for sale and
registered in the State of California)
Volvo Trucks North America warrants the Emission Control Systems on
each new VOLVO diesel engine in a new VOLVO truck to comply with
all State of California emissions regulations applicable at the time of
manufacture of the engine, and to be free from defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service up to 60 months, or
100,000 miles, or 3,000 engine operating hours, whichever occurs first,
provided all Volvo Trucks North America maintenance requirements
are followed as described in this manual. All warranty periods are
calculated from the date-in-service of the new vehicle. The repair or
replacement of defective parts will be made without charge for the cost
of parts and, if repairs are made at an authorized Volvo Trucks North
America dealership, there will be no charge for labor.
10
vn-vhd.bk Page 11 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Volvo Trucks North America’s obligation under this warranty is limited
to the repair or replacement, at Volvo Trucks North America's option, of
any part(s) of the Emission Control Systems of such engine and/or
vehicle found to be defective upon examination by Volvo Trucks North
America and provided that such part(s) were returned to Volvo Trucks
North America or its nearest authorized Dealer within a reasonable
period of time.
Qualifications and Limitations:
Not covered by the Emissions Control Systems Warranty:
앫
Malfunctions caused by misuse, improper adjustments,
modification, alteration, tampering, disconnection, improper or
inadequate maintenance and use of improper diesel fuel.
앫
Damage resulting from accident, acts of nature or other events
beyond the control of Volvo Trucks North America.
앫
Inconvenience, loss of use of the vehicle, commercial loss of any
kind including, but not limited to, consequential, incidental
damages.
앫
Any vehicle in which the odometer has been altered or damaged
so that mileage cannot be readily determined.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS OR CONDITIONS,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
PROCEDURES FOR HANDLING EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
The following engine components are covered by the supplemental
emissions control system warranty policy as required by the California
Code of Regulations.
a.
Turbocharger Assembly
b.
VGT Actuator Control Valve
c.
Charge Air Cooler
d.
Unit Injectors
e.
Engine Wiring Harness
11
vn-vhd.bk Page 12 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
f.
Electronic Control Module
g.
EGR Mixer
h.
EGR Cooler
i.
EGR Control Valve
j.
Crankcase Breather
k.
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Assembly
l.
DPF Components:
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
m.
Sensors:
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
12
Aftertreatment Hydrocarbon Injector (AHI)
AHI Shutoff Valve
Discharge Recirculation Valve
DRV Solenoid Valve
Pre-Catalyst Temp. Sensor
Post-Catalyst Temp. Sensor
Downstream DPF Temp. Sensor
Differential Pressure Sensor
Engine Timing/Speed (flywheel)
Engine Position (camshaft)
Temperature — Coolant
Temperature — Inlet Manifold Air
Pressure — Boost Air
Humidity
EGR Temperature
EGR Differential Pressure
NOX Sensor
vn-vhd.bk Page 13 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
The emission warranty for the diesel particulate filter covers defects in
workmanship only. Normal maintenance, such as cleaning ash from
the filter at regular maintenance intervals, is not covered by the
emission warranty.
In response to customer requests, Volvo Trucks North
America may build vehicles with engines supplied by
other manufacturers, including, but not limited to,
Cummins. In these cases, each engine manufacturer
through its service organization, is responsible for
emission control systems warranty on all parts of the
engine assembly, as furnished.
Any unauthorized adjustments to the emission control
components can cause severe damage to the engine.
1.
Repairs by VOLVO Dealers, Sub-Dealers and Service Dealers
Repairs covered by the California Emission Control Systems
Warranty will be performed by any authorized VOLVO repair
facility at his place of business with no charge for parts and labor
(including diagnosis), using VOLVO parts for any part of the
emission control systems covered by this warranty and found
defective.
13
vn-vhd.bk Page 14 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
2.
In an Emergency
In an emergency, where an authorized VOLVO facility is not
available, repairs may be performed at any available service
establishment, or by the owner, using any replacement part,
within the limitations of paragraphs 4 and 5 in this section. An
emergency condition exists under this section if, after 30 days,
repairs have not been completed or parts are not yet available.
VOLVO will reimburse the owner for such repairs that are covered
under this warranty, including diagnosis, not to exceed VOLVO’s
suggested retail price for parts replaced and labor charges based
on VOLVO’s recommended time allowance and geographically
appropriate hourly labor rate. Replaced parts and paid invoices
must be presented at a VOLVO facility as a condition of
reimbursement for emergency repairs performed elsewhere.
In the event that damage results from unauthorized
adjustments to any emission control system
components, as evidenced by settings other than as
specified, or broken fastener seals, the cost of
repairing such damage WILL NOT BE COVERED
under warranty.
3.
Repairs by Non-VOLVO Facilities
Owners may elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emission control systems performed by any repair facility, and
may elect to use parts other than VOLVO parts without
invalidating the warranty on other components, but the cost of
such service or parts will not be covered by VOLVO under its
warranty.
14
vn-vhd.bk Page 15 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
4.
Use of Non-VOLVO Parts
Use of replacement parts which are not the equivalent of VOLVO
parts may impair the effectiveness of emission control systems. If
other than VOLVO parts are used, the owner should obtain
assurances that such parts are warranted by their manufacturer
to be the equivalent of VOLVO parts in performance and
durability. VOLVO assumes no liability under this warranty with
respect to parts other than VOLVO parts; however, the use of
non-VOLVO parts does not invalidate the warranty on other
components unless non-VOLVO parts cause damage to
warranted parts.
5.
Maintenance and Maintenance Records
The vehicle owner is responsible for the performance of all
required maintenance specified in this manual.
VOLVO will not deny a warranty claim solely because there is no
record of maintenance; however, VOLVO may deny a warranty
claim if failure to perform required maintenance results in the
failure of a warranted part. Receipts or other records covering the
performance of scheduled maintenance should be retained to
answer questions that may arise concerning maintenance.
Maintenance records should be transferred to subsequent
owners if the vehicle is sold.
6.
Items Not Covered by the Emission Control Systems
Warranty
— Malfunctions caused by misuse, improper adjustments,
modification, alteration, tampering, disconnection, improper or
inadequate maintenance.
— Damage resulting from accident, acts of nature or other
events beyond the control of VOLVO.
— Inconvenience, loss of use of the vehicle, or commercial loss.
— Any vehicle on which the odometer has been changed so that
mileage cannot be readily determined.
15
vn-vhd.bk Page 16 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
7.
Customer Assistance
Volvo Trucks North America wishes to assure that the California
Emission Control Systems Warranty is properly administered. In
the event that owners do not receive the warranty service to
which they believe they are entitled under the California Emission
Control Systems Warranty, they should contact Volvo Trucks
North America Warranty Administration, (336) 393-2000. The
address and telephone number of each Regional Office is in your
vehicle owner's package. Owners in need of additional assistance
or information concerning the California Emission Control
Systems Warranty may also contact:
Volvo Trucks North America
Warranty Administration
(336) 393-2000
16
vn-vhd.bk Page 17 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS SERVICE RECORD
CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS SERVICE RECORD
DATE
KM/MILES
SERVICE PERFORMED
SERVICED BY
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
__/__/__
17
vn-vhd.bk Page 18 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
GASEOUS EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS WARRANTY
For emission control systems information on engines
other than VOLVO, refer to the engine vendor’s
publications.
Volvo Trucks North America warrants the Emission Control Systems on
each new VOLVO diesel engine in a new VOLVO truck to comply with
all United States Federal and Canadian emissions regulations
applicable at the time of manufacture of the engine, and to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service up
to 60 months, or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first, provided all
Volvo Trucks North America maintenance requirements are followed as
described in this manual. All warranty periods are calculated from the
date-in-service of the new vehicle. The repair or replacement of
defective parts will be made without charge for the cost of parts and, if
repairs are made at an authorized Volvo Trucks North America
dealership, there will be no charge for labor.
Volvo Trucks North America's obligation under this warranty is limited
to the repair or replacement, at Volvo Trucks North America's option, of
any part(s) of the Emission Control Systems of such engine and/or
vehicle found to be defective upon examination by Volvo Trucks North
America and provided that such part(s) were returned to Volvo Trucks
North America or its nearest authorized Dealer within a reasonable
period of time.
18
vn-vhd.bk Page 19 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Qualifications and Limitations:
Not covered by the Emissions Control Systems Warranty:
앫
Malfunctions caused by misuse, improper adjustments,
modification, alteration, tampering, disconnection, improper or
inadequate maintenance and use of improper diesel fuel.
앫
Damage resulting from accident, acts of nature or other events
beyond the control of Volvo Trucks North America.
앫
Inconvenience, loss of use of the vehicle, commercial loss of any
kind including, but not limited to, consequential, incidental
damages.
앫
Any vehicle in which the odometer has been altered or damaged
so that mileage cannot be readily determined.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS OR CONDITIONS,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
ENGINE GASEOUS EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
FEDERAL EMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The following engine components are covered by the supplemental
emissions control system warranty policy as required by the Federal
emissions regulations.
a.
Turbocharger Assembly
b.
VGT Actuator Control Valve
c.
Charge Air Cooler
d.
Unit Injectors
e.
Engine Wiring Harness
f.
Electronic Control Module
g.
EGR Mixer
h.
EGR Cooler
i.
EGR Control Valve
j.
Crankcase Breather
19
vn-vhd.bk Page 20 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
k.
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Assembly
l.
DPF Components:
앫
Aftertreatment Hydrocarbon Injector (AHI)
앫
AHI Shutoff Valve
앫
Discharge Recirculation Valve
앫
DRV Solenoid Valve
앫
Pre-Catalyst Temp. Sensor
앫
Post-Catalyst Temp. Sensor
앫
Downstream DPF Temp. Sensor
앫
Differential Pressure Sensor
m.
Sensors:
앫
Engine Timing/Speed (flywheel)
앫
Engine Position (camshaft)
앫
Temperature — Coolant
앫
Temperature — Inlet Manifold Air
앫
Pressure — Boost Air
앫
Humidity
앫
EGR Temperature
앫
EGR Differential Pressure
앫
NOX Sensor
The emission warranty for the diesel particulate filter covers defects in
workmanship only. Normal maintenance, such as cleaning ash from
the filter at regular maintenance intervals, is not covered by the
emission warranty.
In response to customer requests, Volvo Trucks North
America may build vehicles with engines supplied by
other manufacturers, including, but not limited to,
Cummins. In these cases, each engine manufacturer
through its service organization, is responsible for
emission control systems warranty on all parts of the
engine assembly, as furnished.
20
vn-vhd.bk Page 21 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
FEDERAL EMISSION REQUIREMENTS
This section covers the requirement of the United States Clean Air Act
which states:
“The manufacturer shall furnish with each new motor vehicle or motor
vehicle engine such written instructions for the maintenance and use of
the vehicle or engine by the ultimate purchaser as may be reasonable
and necessary to assure the proper functioning of emission control
devices and systems.”
This section also covers the requirements of the emissions regulations
promulgated under the Motor Vehicle Safety Act in Canada.
TAMPERING WITH GASEOUS EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
PROHIBITED
The Federal Clean Air Act prohibits the removal or rendering
inoperative of any device or element of design installed on or in a motor
vehicle or motor vehicle engine in compliance with Federal Emission
Regulations by:
1.
Any person prior to its sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser,
or
2.
Any manufacturer or distributor after its sale and delivery to the
ultimate purchaser, or
3.
Any person engaged in the business of repairing, servicing,
selling, leasing, or trading motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines
following its sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser, or
4.
Any person who operates a fleet of motor vehicles following its
sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser.
21
vn-vhd.bk Page 22 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER PRECAUTIONS
Diesel Particulate Filters (DPF) and related components cannot be
moved or altered from the OEM installation in any fashion,
앫
Moving or altering the DPF or related components will result in
emission system malfunction or failure.
앫
Altering the emissions system is prohibited by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA).
앫
Dealers and/or upfitters (body builders/installers) are not
authorized to alter or modify the emissions system or any of the
emissions-related components.
ENGINES OTHER THAN VOLVO
For specific information on engines other than VOLVO, refer to the
engine vendor’s publications.
Noise Emissions
Volvo Trucks North America warrants to the first person who purchases
this vehicle for purposes other than resale and to each subsequent
purchaser, that this vehicle as manufactured by Volvo Trucks North
America was designed, built and equipped to conform, at the time it left
the control of Volvo Trucks North America, with all applicable U.S. EPA
Noise Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and equipped by
Volvo Trucks North America, and is not limited to any particular part,
component or system of the vehicle manufactured by Volvo Trucks
North America. Defects in design, assembly or in any part, component
or system of the vehicle as manufactured by Volvo Trucks North
America, which, at the time it left the control of Volvo Trucks North
America caused noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are
covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
22
vn-vhd.bk Page 23 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Noise Control System, Operator Inspection and Maintenance
Requirements
A Noise Control System Maintenance Log is located in “Noise Control
Log” on page 27. This log should be used to document all Noise
Control System-related maintenance, whether the maintenance results
from a specific noise control system inspection, or a deficiency
identified during another general maintenance event.
If additional log space is needed, further entries may be added on a
separate sheet of paper. Store these additions with the main log to
preserve a comprehensive record. It is recommended that copies of all
noise emissions-related maintenance invoices be retained.
The following Noise Control System inspection and maintenance
instructions contain suggested maintenance intervals. These intervals
may need adjustment in order to best accommodate the specific
vehicle usage. The following instructions only concern Noise
Emissions-related items and do not address or modify any general
vehicle maintenance requirements.
The following elements make up the Noise Control System:
앫
Noise Shielding and Insulation Devices
앫
Cooling System
앫
Exhaust System/DPF System
앫
Air Intake/Air Induction System
앫
Engine Control, EGR and Fuel Systems
Tampering with Noise Control System
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:
(1) The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for
purposes of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any device or
element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of
noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or
while it is in use;
or
(2) the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has
been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
23
vn-vhd.bk Page 24 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Among the acts that constitute tampering are the acts listed below:
앫
Removal, or rendering inoperative, of any exhaust components,
including mufflers, heavy or double-wall exhaust tubing, flexible
tubing or exhaust pipe clamping.
앫
Removal, or rendering inoperative, of the temperature-modulated
cooling fan system.
앫
Removal of the cooling fan shroud.
앫
Removal, or rendering inoperative, of the air cleaner or air intake
in-line silencer.
앫
Removal of the sound deadening material from the hood or cab
tunnel.
앫
Removal, or rendering inoperative, of the engine speed governor
so as to allow engine speed to exceed the manufacturer's
specifications.
앫
Removal of splash shields located inside the wheel housings.
앫
Removal of engine block shields.
앫
Removal of engine crankcase shields or insulation.
앫
Removal of insulated rocker arm covers.
앫
Removal of transmission noise shields.
Noise Shielding and Insulation Devices
Maintenance
Ensure sound shielding and insulating devices are intact. Inspect
components for damage. Primary system components requiring noiserelated inspection include the hood, engine compartment insulating
materials (including hood insulation, bulkhead insulation, doghouse
insulation, etc.) splash shields, cab skirts, fender shields, and body
panels. Inspect all related fasteners, brackets, and clamps for damage
and tightness.
Regulatory Compliance
Acts that constitute tampering with the Noise Shielding and Insulation
Devices:
Removing or rendering inoperative the engine and/or transmission
noise deadening panels, shields or insulating materials.
24
vn-vhd.bk Page 25 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Removing or rendering inoperative the cab-tunnel or hood noise
insulating materials.
Removing or rendering inoperative any vehicle body-mounted sound
insulation components and/or shields (cab or fender shields, skirts,
wheel housing splash shields, etc.).
Cooling System
DO NOT work near the fan with the engine running
or the ignition in the ON position. The engine fan
can engage at any time without warning. Anyone
near the fan when it turns on could be seriously
injured.
Maintenance
Visually inspect cooling system components for damage, and/or
misalignment.
Primary system components requiring noise-related inspection include
fan blades, fan clutch, fan shroud, fan ring, and recirculation shields.
Check fan blades, fan ring, fan shroud, belt tensioner and recirculation
shields for any damage. Verify that fan blades clear the fan ring.
Inspect all related fasteners, brackets, and clamps for damage and
tightness. Confirm operation of temperature modulated fan clutch.
Regulatory Compliance
Acts that constitute tampering with the Cooling System:
Removing or rendering inoperative cooling system components (such
as the temperature modulated fan clutch, fan shroud, fan ring,
recirculation shields, etc.).
Exhaust System
Hot engine! Avoid all movable parts or hot engine
parts, exhaust gases, and/or fluids. A hot engine,
exhaust, and/or fluids can cause burns.
25
vn-vhd.bk Page 26 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Maintenance
Make sure the exhaust system is intact. Inspect for damage,
misalignment and/or leakage. Primary system components requiring
noise-related inspection include exhaust manifold, turbocharger, and
all exhaust system (rigid and flexible) piping. Closely check the system
for exhaust leaks. Special attention should be given to all welds,
seams, gaskets, support points, clamps, couplings and connections.
Inspect all exhaust system fasteners, brackets, and clamps for damage
and tightness.
Regulatory Compliance
Acts that constitute tampering with the Exhaust System:
Removing or rendering inoperative exhaust system components (such
as the pipes, clamps, etc.).
Air Intake/Air Induction System
Maintenance
Make sure the air intake system is intact. Inspect components for
damage, misalignment and/or leakage. Primary system components
requiring noise-related inspection include the air cleaner housing, air
cleaner element, turbocharger, charge air cooler and intake manifold.
Also inspect all ducts, pipes, hoses, tubing and elbows used to
interconnect the system. Special attention should be given to all welds,
seams, gaskets, support points, clamps, couplings and connections.
Inspect all intake system fasteners, brackets, and clamps for damage
and tightness.
Regulatory Compliance
Acts that constitute tampering with the Air Intake/Air Induction System:
Removing or rendering inoperative air intake/induction system
components (filter, filter housings, ducts, etc.).
Engine Control, EGR and Fuel Systems
Acts that constitute tampering with Engine Control, EGR and Fuel
Systems:
Removing rendering inoperative, or modifying the engine control
system such as the ECU, EGR system components, or fuel system
components, in order to allow the engine to operate outside of the
manufacturer's specifications is not allowed and violates both warranty
and legislation.
26
vn-vhd.bk Page 27 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Noise Control Log
NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE LOG
DATE
MILEAGE
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
MAINTENANCE
FACILITY
27
vn-vhd.bk Page 28 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE DATA
Identification and Labels
It is extremely important that the correct vehicle model and serial
number are given whenever replacement parts or service literature are
ordered. Using these numbers, as well as giving the major component
model and serial numbers, will prevent delay and errors in obtaining
the correct material. Space is given on the rear inside cover of this
manual for noting the main component model and serial numbers.
The full 17-digit Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is shown on the
Vehicle Identification label located in the door opening on the driver's
side. Vehicles for export, excluding Canadian vehicles, have the full
17-digit VIN on the frame.
The 8-digit chassis number is embossed into the bottom flange
right-hand side of the frame rail and the top flange left-hand side of the
frame rail, 1065 mm (42 inches) back from the front edge of the frame
rail. The use of this number is very helpful when ordering parts for your
vehicle.
28
vn-vhd.bk Page 29 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Three labels are located in the rear inside frame of the driver side door
frame. These labels should not be removed.
To deter tampering with the original build information,
the information on the label will be destroyed if the
label is removed. If for any reason a label is damaged,
contact your authorized Volvo Truck dealer for a
replacement.
Vehicle Order
The Vehicle Order is a complete and detailed record of all data
pertaining to the assembly of the vehicle. It should be filed in the
Owner's office where it will be readily available for reference. Any
changes made to the vehicle must become a part of the Vehicle Order
and must comply with all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
29
vn-vhd.bk Page 30 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Certification Label
On the top part of the door frame is the Certification label showing the
axle and load ratings for the vehicle as it is built. DO NOT exceed these
ratings by overloading.
Vehicle Identification Label
The VIN is shown on the Vehicle Identification label. The VIN includes
the vehicle make, model series, weight class, engine model, where the
vehicle was built and the vehicle serial number. This label also shows
the truck model designation, major component model and serial
number, cab model and serial number, cab and chassis paint colors,
and color numbers.
Noise Emission Control Label
The Noise Emission Control label is located at the bottom of the three
labels on the rear inside frame of the driver side door. It is the owner's
responsibility to maintain the vehicle so that it conforms to EPA
regulations.
30
vn-vhd.bk Page 31 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Clean Idle Engines
The California Air Resources Board (ARB) requires that 2008 model
year vehicles be equipped with engines having tamper-resistant
software which limits the time at which the engine can idle at speeds
above low idle (550–700 rpm). At speeds above low idle, and without a
PTO engaged, idle time will be limited to five minutes, after which the
engine will revert back to low idle. Vehicles equipped with a Clean Idle
engine are identified by a label which is affixed to the left front corner of
the hood.
Clean Idle Engine Label
31
vn-vhd.bk Page 32 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
Component Labels
The Volvo engine serial number is located on the front left side of the
cylinder block. The serial number can also be found on the certification
label on the valve cover.
The axle model and serial number is located on the front left side of the
forward drive axle and the front right side of the rear drive axle. It is
also located on the front right side of the single axle.
32
vn-vhd.bk Page 33 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
SERVICE LITERATURE
To order a single Service Manual or a Service Manual Set for your
vehicle, contact your authorized Volvo Truck dealer.
In order to handle the request correctly, you must give the model, year
and VIN (last six digits of VIN only).
(For VIN location, see “Identification and Labels” on page 28.)
Service Manual prices will vary depending on the make and model of
engine in the vehicle. (A Cummins engine manual is included in your
introductory owner's package.)
Please allow 30 days for delivery of Manual.
Name
Company
Address
CSZ (Province, Postal Code)
Vehicle Model
Phone/Fax
Model Year
VIN
Item1:
Item 2:
Item 3:
Item 4:
Item 5:
33
vn-vhd.bk Page 34 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
SERVICE ASSISTANCE
Your authorized Volvo Truck dealer is trained and equipped to perform
expert service on your Volvo vehicle. Your dealer has direct access to
Volvo Trucks North America for technical help, parts or service
information.
There is also a direct number to Volvo Action Service (VAS), staffed
24 hours a day, if you are in need of assistance. The number to the
Customer Support Center is: 1 (800) 528-6586 [or (800) 52-VOLVO].
Also on the internet: www.vas.volvo.com
VAS offers:
Delivery Assurance — If you need roadside assistance, VAS can
arrange for load forwarding or equipment rental.
Personal Assurance — Trained staff for handling any vehicle
problems.
Uptime Assurance — VAS will locate the nearest service provider and
guarantee payment so you can get on the road as soon as possible.
Price Assurance — VAS audits service and parts billing to ensure
guaranteed labor rates and preferred parts pricing for Volvo
components.
34
vn-vhd.bk Page 35 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
United States
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash,
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying Volvo
Trucks North America.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your distributor, or Volvo
Trucks North America.
To contact NHTSA, either call the U.S. Government’s Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.NHTSA.gov; or write to: Administrator, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from the Vehicle Safety Hotline.
Canada
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to
Transport Canada — Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll free hotline at 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport Canada by
mail at Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks
Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5. For additional road safety information,
please visit the Road Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm.
Mexico
Volvo Trucks de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. should be informed immediately if
you believe the vehicle has a defect that could cause a vehicle
accident, injury or death. Contact Volvo Trucks de Mexico by calling
011-52-55-50-81-68-50 or by writing to: Volvo Trucks de Mexico, S.A.
de C.V., Prol. Paseo de la Reforma 600, 1er. Piso – 121, Col. Santa Fe
Pena Blanca, C.P. 01210, Mexico, D.F. Within Mexico, call
01 (800) 90 94 900.
35
vn-vhd.bk Page 36 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INTRODUCTION
EVENT DATA RECORDING DEVICES
Your Volvo vehicle is equipped with a device generally referred to as an
“event data recorder” or “EDR.” Please note that while the term “event
data recorder” is typically used throughout the motor vehicle industry,
not every EDR is the same; i.e., they do not all record the same data
elements. The EDR on your Volvo vehicle records vehicle speed,
engine rpm, time and date, plus a variety of pedal and switch positions,
both before and after an “event.” Sudden vehicle deceleration or the
occurrence of certain other vehicle operational characteristics will
define (trigger) an “event.”
If you have a question about your EDR, please contact your Volvo
dealer or regional service office.
36
vn-vhd.bk Page 37 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VORAD® COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . 41
ADVISORY LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CAB ENTRY AND EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ENTERING SLEEPER FROM SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SAFETY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
37
vn-vhd.bk Page 38 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
Operating the Vehicle
Never try to operate or work on this vehicle while
under the influence of alcohol. Your reflexes can
be affected by the smallest amount of alcohol.
Drinking and operating this vehicle can lead to an
accident, causing serious personal injury or death.
All items within the cab must be secured before
the vehicle is set in motion. This includes, but is
not limited to, drinks, clothes, books, televisions,
etc. In the event of a collision, loose items could
fly around inside the cab. This could cause
personal injury.
Every vehicle, including heavy duty vehicles, have blind spots. The size
of blind spots vary from driver to driver and from situation to situation.
As a skilled, professional driver, you are in the best position to avoid
accidents in turns, lane changes or other maneuvers. Volvo Trucks
North America provides standard equipment (such as cabs,
windshields, window sizes and mirrors), preferred by most owners and
drivers under most conditions and in most applications.
However, due to differences in the size of drivers, their seating
positions, the use and operation of their vehicles, personal preferences
and other factors, no combination of mirrors and other visibility
enhancement devices can eliminate all blind spots in every situation.
38
vn-vhd.bk Page 39 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
The safe operation of this vehicle is determined by you, the driver.
Because of your special preferences, needs and circumstances, you
may choose to add extra mirrors and/or other visibility enhancement
devices. If so, contact an authorized Volvo Truck dealer to obtain parts
which best fit your personal needs and preferences.
Operating in Bobtail Mode
When operating bobtail, be certain that glad hands,
trailer air hoses, electrical cable and connectors are
properly stowed and secure. Do not allow them to rub
or chafe on other components.
Depending on customer specification, some tractors may be equipped
with a bobtail air brake proportioning valve which automatically
redistributes the braking force between front and rear axles when not
hooked up to a semitrailer (bobtail operation).
When operating in bobtail mode, the rear brake chambers receive
reduced or proportional brake air pressure. When the tractor is towing
a trailer, the rear brake chambers will receive full (normal) brake
pressure. For tractors with no proportioning valve, the ABS system
automatically controls brake pressure.
DO NOT Overload
Under no circumstances should the published
GVWR, FAWR, and/or RAWR be exceeded. Failure
to observe these precautions can lead to the loss
of vehicle control, resulting in a vehicle accident
causing serious personal injury or death.
39
vn-vhd.bk Page 40 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
DO NOT exceed the load rating of the tires or the
vehicle weight ratings. Overloading may result in
tire failure causing loss of vehicle control, leading
to an accident resulting in severe personal injury
or death.
This vehicle has been designed and assembled for a maximum gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and a maximum front and rear axle
weights rating (FAWR and RAWR). The actual rating for this vehicle
can be found on the label attached to the door frame on the driver's
side. If any of these three ratings is exceeded and overloading occurs,
instability, poor handling, failure of parts and accelerated wear can
occur.
40
vn-vhd.bk Page 41 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
VORAD® COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
The Eaton® VORAD® computerized Collision Warning System
constantly monitors vehicles ahead with a front end-mounted radar and
in a blind spot area with an optional side-mounted radar. The Collision
Warning System warns the driver of potentially dangerous situations by
activating visual and audible alerts.
The Eaton® VORAD® Collision Warning System is
intended solely as an aid for an alert and
conscientious professional driver. It is not to be
used or relied upon to operate the vehicle. Use
this system together with rear view mirrors and
other instrumentation to maintain safe operation
of the vehicle. Operate a VORAD® equipped
vehicle in the same safe manner as if VORAD® was
not installed.
The Eaton® VORAD® Collision Warning System is
not a substitute for safe driving procedures nor
will it compensate for any driver impairment, such
as drugs, alcohol or fatigue.
The Eaton® VORAD® Collision Warning System
may provide little or no warning for some hazards
like: alerts for pedestrians, animals, oncoming
vehicles and cross traffic. SmartCruise will not
react to stationary objects and it does not have the
capability to stop the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to a
vehicle accident resulting in severe personal
injury or death.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Eaton® VORAD® Collision Warning
System, read the manufacturer's Driver Reference Manual before
taking the vehicle on the road.
41
vn-vhd.bk Page 42 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
ADVISORY LABELS
Throughout this book you will find paragraphs labeled Danger,
Warning, Caution, Note and Service Hint. Danger, Caution and
Warning labels are also found in various locations on the vehicle to
alert drivers, operators and service technicians to situations which can
cause personal injury or equipment damage. The labels shown are
applicable to the VN model chassis at the time of publication and are
representative of what can be typically found on a VHD. (Your vehicle
may not contain all of the labels illustrated in this handbook.) These
labels are for your benefit. Please look through this section and note
the labels, their locations and what they explain. Be sure to replace any
label that is damaged.
CAB ENTRY AND EXIT
General
DO NOT stand on the steps or any other part of the
vehicle while it is in motion. The steps and the
back of cab access deck plates are only for
entering/exiting the vehicle and not for riding on.
Failure to heed this warning can result in serious
personal injury or death.
Steps are designed to be slip resistant and to
provide a stable surface for entering or exiting the
cab. However, accumulation of ice, dirt, lubricants,
etc. on the steps can make entering or exiting
hazardous. Always make sure the steps are free
from slippery substances. Failure to follow this
guideline may result in a fall that can cause
serious personal injury or death.
42
vn-vhd.bk Page 43 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
To avoid personal injury due to a slip and/or fall,
observe all the guidelines explained in this
section.
Wearing shoes with soles that are dirty or wet
increases the chance of injury from slipping and
falling. Be careful when entering the cab with dirty
or wet soles.
Both the operator and passenger should exercise
caution when entering or exiting the cab. Use the
steps and grab handles to safely get in and out of
the cab.
Always check the security of cab panel, fairing and
steps before use. Ensure that the cab panels or
fairings are completely closed and the handles are
in the locked position.
DO NOT open fairing while cab door is open. This can
result in paint damage on the fairing.
43
vn-vhd.bk Page 44 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
VN
44
vn-vhd.bk Page 45 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
VN without Fairings or VHD
45
vn-vhd.bk Page 46 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
General Entry Guidelines
To avoid personal injury due to a slip and/or fall,
observe the following guidelines.
BE SURE TO FOLLOW ALL OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
ENTERING OR EXITING THE CAB OR THE AREA BEHIND THE
CAB.
1.
Always have three limbs (one foot and two hands or two feet and
one hand) in contact with the vehicle at all times when entering or
exiting the cab or the area behind the cab.
2.
Be certain you have a firm handhold and/or stable foot position
before transferring weight to that position. For example, do not
start to put weight on a foot until you are certain your foot is
properly on the step and will not slip when you transfer your
weight.
3.
DO NOT climb on top of the frame, fuel tanks or storage boxes to
make trailer hook-ups.
4.
If the vehicle is equipped with air fairings, do not use the
side-mounted fairing (wind deflector) brackets and braces as
steps or grab handles.
5.
Be certain that the grab handles are clear of snow, mud, ice or
other substances that could make them slippery before using
them. DO NOT use steps or grab handles if they are slippery or
damaged.
6.
Be certain that all grab handles, steps and related parts are in
good working condition. Any defects should be reported and
repaired before using the grab handles and steps.
7.
DO NOT step on the curved surface of the fuel tanks. They may
be slippery from snow, mud, ice, water, spilled fuel or other
slippery substances.
8.
If a step is mounted to the top of the battery box, be certain that
the battery box cover is properly fastened before stepping.
46
vn-vhd.bk Page 47 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
9.
If a vehicle is equipped with removable chassis fairings or cab
panels, be certain the fairing or cab panel is properly fastened
before using steps.
10.
DO NOT jump from the cab or from the steps to the ground.
11.
Always face the cab when entering or exiting.
12.
DO NOT hold anything in your hands when entering or exiting the
cab or the area behind the cab. Log books, cups, clipboards,
jackets, luggage and the like can be placed on the cab floor or rear
deck plate before entering or exiting.
13.
Make sure your safety belt is disconnected before exiting the cab.
14.
Make sure the safety belt is fully retracted and out of the way prior
to entering or exiting the cab.
15.
DO NOT put your foot on any surface that does not have slip
resistant, self-cleaning material. If there is no step material, the
surface may be slippery and you may fall.
16.
Before entering or exiting, be certain that the soles of your
shoes/boots are free from grease, mud or any other substance
which could make them slippery.
17.
Always put the foot flat on the top of the step. DO NOT place your
foot on the side or edge of the step.
Driver Side Entry/Exit
On vehicles without side fairings or cab panels,
always make sure that the battery box cover is
securely fastened before stepping up. Failure to
fasten the cover may lead to a fall and personal
injury.
Open the door. Place any hand-carried items on the cab floor. Grasp
the right grab handle with your right hand and the left grab handle with
your left hand. Put the right foot fully on the bottom step and pull
yourself up to the opening.
47
vn-vhd.bk Page 48 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary. Put the left foot on the top
step and step up. Step into the cab with the right foot first.
To exit, reverse the process. Do not attempt to exit the cab while
carrying any items in your hands.
48
vn-vhd.bk Page 49 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Passenger Side Entry/Exit
Open the door. Place any hand-carried items on the cab floor. Grasp
the left grab handle with your left hand and the right grab handle with
your right hand. Put the left foot fully on the bottom step and pull
yourself up to the opening.
Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary. Put the right foot on the
top step and step up. Step into the cab with the left foot first.
To exit, reverse the process. Do not attempt to exit the cab while
carrying any items in your hands.
49
vn-vhd.bk Page 50 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Behind the Cab Access
Be careful when entering the back-of-cab area with
dirty or wet soles. Wearing shoes with soles that
are dirty or wet increases the chance of slipping or
falling.
When trailer air and electrical connections cannot be coupled from the
ground, Federal Regulations require commercial carriers to provide
back-of-cab access steps, grab handles and plates.
Depending on what option is chosen, grab handles are available in
many variations. In each case, make sure to always have three limbs
(one foot and two hands or two feet and one hand) in contact with the
vehicle at all times when entering or exiting the area behind the cab.
50
vn-vhd.bk Page 51 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Grasp the grab handle to the left with both hands. Put the left foot onto
the bottom step and pull yourself up. Put the right foot on the top step
and step onto the deck plate with the left foot.
Always perform trailer hook-ups while standing on
the ground. DO NOT climb on top of fuel tanks or
frame rails to hook up or disconnect trailer air
lines and electrical cord. Use only the metal, slip
resistant steps provided to prevent a slip and fall
injury.
51
vn-vhd.bk Page 52 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Stand on the ground when connecting the air and electrical
connections to the trailer.
52
vn-vhd.bk Page 53 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
ENTERING SLEEPER FROM SEAT
Standard Gear Lever
Be careful when standing to your feet in the seat area,
headroom is limiting.
When moving from the driver seat to the sleeper section, follow this
procedure:
앫
Make sure the parking brakes are set.
앫
Place the gear shift lever in a gear position toward the rear of the
vehicle.
앫
If equipped with an adjustable steering column, move the steering
wheel up and forward.
앫
Place the left hand on the steering wheel and the right hand on
the top of the gear lever.
앫
Move the right foot out to the middle of the floor.
앫
Lift the upper body, supported by the hands on the steering wheel
and the gear lever and step out from the seat area.
53
vn-vhd.bk Page 54 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
54
vn-vhd.bk Page 55 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Safety triangles and fire extinguishers are available as optional
equipment. The fire extinguisher should be located by the base of the
driver seat, between the seat and the door.
Always store the warning triangles in the box after use.
55
vn-vhd.bk Page 56 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Warning Triangles, Day Cab
The warning triangles are stored in a box that is strapped behind the
passenger seat.
56
vn-vhd.bk Page 57 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
SAFETY INFORMATION
Sleeper Cab
The warning triangles are stored in a box, which is inside the exterior
luggage compartment.
57
vn-vhd.bk Page 58 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
NOTES
58
vn-vhd.bk Page 59 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CAB INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DASH SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONIC CLIMATE
CONTROL (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
AIR CONDITIONING MANUAL CLIMATE
CONTROL (MCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
SLEEPER CLIMATE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
LIGHT CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
SLEEPER CONTROL PANEL (SLEEPER MODELS
ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
MISCELLANEOUS CAB EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
CAB VENTILATION, SLEEPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PARKING HEATER (OPTIONAL, SLEEPER
MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
ANTENNAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
TELEVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SLEEPER BUNKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
VN 780, VNL 730, VN 670 OFFICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
SLEEPER COMPARTMENT SINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
59
vn-vhd.bk Page 60 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAB INTERIOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
60
Instrument Cluster
Cab Climate Control Panel
Accelerator Pedal
Brake Pedal
5. Clutch Pedal (If Equipped)
6. Steering Column Tilt Control
Pedal
vn-vhd.bk Page 61 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tell-Tales
A tell-tale is a display that indicates the actuation of a device, a correct
or defective condition, or a failure to function.
The operator should become familiar with these symbols in order to
recognize and react (if necessary) to the indicated condition. Tell-tale
symbols are shown in the instrument panel illustrations on the following
pages.
Colors
To promote visual recognition internationally, specific colors for
tell-tales have been established. Unless governmental regulations (in
the area where the vehicle is to be used) or engineering directives
specify otherwise, the standard colors are:
앫
Blue — high-beam headlights/engine maintenance
앫
Flashing Green — turn signals
앫
Flashing Red — hazard condition involving the safety of
personnel
앫
Steady Green — system in operation
앫
Steady Red — warning, immediate action required
앫
Amber — early warning, such as low fuel or Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) malfunction
61
vn-vhd.bk Page 62 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Panel Arrangement
Your view from the driver seat should look something like the
illustrations shown. The layout is designed to provide the operator with
a good view of the gauges and controls (which are placed so they are
within easy reach). The instrument panel, as shown in the following
drawing, is broken down into several main sections. For easy
identification we refer to them, from left to right, as Panels A, B, C, D, E
and F (where necessary).
This section shows the instruments and controls
available for this vehicle at the time of publication.
However, depending on options, your vehicle may not
have all the instruments and controls shown here, and
they may not be in the same position.
62
vn-vhd.bk Page 63 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL GAUGE LAYOUT
Panel Arrangement
63
vn-vhd.bk Page 64 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Panel A
1. Light Control Panel
2. Instrument Cluster
64
3. Trailer Air Supply
4. Tractor Parking Brake
vn-vhd.bk Page 65 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Panel B
65
vn-vhd.bk Page 66 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
5. Inter-Wheel Differential Lock
6. Inter-Axle Differential Lock
7. VN: Idle Management
Indicator Lamp (ISX ICON) or
Optional Switch or
Electronically Controlled
Suspension (ECS) On/Off or
Lift Axle #1 (Pusher)
VHD: Lift Axle #1 (Tag or
Pusher)
8. VN: Optional Switch or
Electronically Controlled
Suspension (ECS) Up/Down
14. Engine Brake or I-Shift
Eco-Roll
15. VN: Engine Brake Mode
Select (ISX) or I-Shift Hill
Start Assist
VHD: Optional Switch or
I-Shift Hill Start Assist
16. VN: 5th Wheel Touch Lock
(Unlock)
VHD: Transmission Retarder
17. Marker Interrupt or
Secondary Gauge Cluster
18. Optional Switch or Secondary
VHD: Lift Axle #2 (Tag or
Gauge Cluster
Pusher)
19. Traction Control
9. Auxiliary #1
20. Suspension Dump
10. VN: Auxiliary #2 or
21. 5th Wheel Slide or Engine
Temp-A-Start (TAS) Indicator
Inside/Outside Air Control
Lamps
22. Air Vent
23. Radio
VHD: Auxiliary #2
24. Fan Speed
11. VN: Auxiliary #3 or
25. Recirculation
Temp-A-Start (TAS) On/Off
26. Air Distribution
VHD: Auxiliary #3 or Lift
27. AC ON/OFF
Axle #3 (Tag or Pusher)
28. Temperature Knob
12. Secondary Gauge Cluster
29. Trailer Hand Brake Control
13. Secondary Gauge Cluster
66
vn-vhd.bk Page 67 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Panel C
30. VN: Optional Switch or
Passenger Window Lift
VHD: Optional Switch
31. Water in Fuel (Purge Switch)
32. Optional Switch or AUX/USB
Port
33. VN: Sleeper Fan Speed
VHD: Snow Plow Lamps
34. VN: Optional Switch or
Beacon Lamps
VHD: Beacon Lamps
67
vn-vhd.bk Page 68 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Panel D
35. Back of Cab Light
36. Optional Switch
37. Optional Switch or Power
Take-Off (PTO)
38. VN: Overhead Bunk Lamp or
Passenger Side Mirror
IN/OUT
VHD: Power Take-Off (PTO)
68
39. VN: Side Mirror Heat or
Power Take-Off (PTO)
VHD: Power Take-Off (PTO)
vn-vhd.bk Page 69 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Panel E
40. AC Inverter 120 V
41. Optional Switch
42. Optional Switch
43. Power Outlet
44. Microphone
Before driving this vehicle, locate the instruments and controls,
and become thoroughly familiar with their operation. After
starting and when driving, ensure that the instrument readings
are normal.
The instruments and controls shown were available for
this vehicle at the time of publication. Depending on
the options selected, all gauges and tell-tales may not
be used in all vehicles.
69
vn-vhd.bk Page 70 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The dash layout is the same for all Volvo vehicles.
However, the switches and certain switch positions are
different depending on vehicle options.
1. Light Control Panel — For more information, please refer to
“LIGHT CONTROL PANEL” on page 128 of this manual.
2. Instrument Cluster
There are three instrument cluster levels available: High, Mid and
Basic.
High Level Cluster
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
70
Tachometer
Upper Tell-Tales
Speedometer
Front Brake Air Pressure
Rear Brake Air Pressure
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
8. Lower Tell-Tales
9. Driver Information Display
(DID)
10. Fuel Level
11. Intake Manifold Pressure
12. Application Air Pressure
13. Exhaust Pyrometer
vn-vhd.bk Page 71 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Mid Level Cluster
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tachometer
Upper Tell-Tales
Speedometer
Front Brake Air Pressure
Rear Brake Air Pressure
6.
7.
8.
9.
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Lower Tell-Tales
Driver Information Display
(DID)
10. Fuel Level
71
vn-vhd.bk Page 72 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Basic Level Cluster
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
72
Tachometer
Upper Tell-Tales
Speedometer
Front Brake Air Pressure
Rear Brake Air Pressure
Oil Pressure
7. Coolant Temperature
8. Middle and Lower Tell-Tales
9. Driver Information Display
(DID)
10. Fuel Level
11. Voltmeter
vn-vhd.bk Page 73 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Tachometer
The tachometer has two colored fields: green and red. Use the green
field for normal driving (1000 to 1600 rpm). Use higher engine speeds
for maximum engine brake performance. Never allow the engine to go
into the red field (greater than 2200 rpm).
To achieve maximum fuel economy, use the Performance Bonus Guide
feature. This feature helps the driver find the most efficient operating
range for the engine. See Performance Bonus Guide for more
information.
Upper Tell-Tales
The Stop, Check and Info message tell-tales are located in the upper
tell-tales box on the instrument cluster. The left and right turn signal
indicators, seat belt tell-tale and parking brake tell-tale are also located
in the upper tell-tales box. Refer to the Driver Information Display
manual for additional information about the message tell-tales.
Speedometer
The speedometer is driven by the vehicle’s electronic system.
Front and Rear Brake System Air Pressure Gauges
The system air gauges are connected to the front and rear circuit tanks
via sensors mounted on the pass-through wall. The two gauges should
register equal air pressure. By observing the gauge pointers, the
operator can detect a pressure drop if an air leak develops and can
readily identify the circuit affected.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in
the loss of braking performance. This can lead to a
vehicle accident, which can result in personal
injury or death.
73
vn-vhd.bk Page 74 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If the pressure in a brake circuit air tank drops below approximately
420 kPa (65 psi), the red LED light in the lower left corner of the gauge
will come on and the STOP tell-tale warning indicator comes on. In
addition, the buzzer comes on if the vehicle starts to move at speed
higher than 1.6 km/h (1 mph). If the vehicle is stationary, only the STOP
tell-tale warning and red LED light appear.
Stop Tell-Tale
If the air pressure drops down below 420 kPa (65 psi) in both systems,
the spring brakes will automatically engage to stop the vehicle.
Oil Pressure Gauge
Failure to take necessary action when the STOP
tell-tale is on can ultimately result in automatic
engine shutdown and loss of power steering
assist. Vehicle crash can occur, resulting in
personal injury or death.
The oil pressure limit is dependent on the engine manufacturer’s
electronic program. When the oil pressure is too low, the red STOP
tell-tale illuminates, the buzzer sounds, and the oil pressure symbol
appears on the Driver Information Display (DID) screen. For example, if
the engine is at risk, the EECU may derate the engine power. Bring the
vehicle to a safe stop where the problem can be checked.
74
vn-vhd.bk Page 75 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Stop Tell-Tale
Oil Pressure Symbol
The engine will shut down within 30 seconds from
when the red STOP tell-tale comes on. Pull off the
road as soon as possible without creating a safety
hazard.
75
vn-vhd.bk Page 76 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Coolant Temperature Gauge
The coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature.
The normal operating temperature for Volvo engines is 80 to 105°C
(170 to 215°F). Under normal driving conditions, the temperature must
be below the red sector.
The temperature range for the coolant will vary depending on the type
of engine, load, grade, ambient air temperature and operating
conditions. If the temperature remains below or exceeds the normal
temperature range, the cooling system should be checked for problems
by an authorized Volvo Truck dealer.
The temperature limit is dependent on the electronic program for the
engine model. When coolant temperature is excessive, the red STOP
tell-tale will come on and the buzzer will sound. The engine is at risk
and the EECU may derate the engine power. Stop at the first safe
place where the problem can be checked.
Stop Tell-Tale
If the coolant temperature returns to normal shortly
after exceeding the limit and no repair is performed,
the warning messages go out, but a fault message will
be logged.
76
vn-vhd.bk Page 77 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Middle and Lower Tell-Tales
The middle and lower tell-tales provide vehicle and component status
information. For more information, refer to the Driver Information
Display manual.
Driver Information Display (DID)
The DID gives the operator necessary and important information about
the vehicle and components. For more information about the DID, refer
to the Driver Information Display manual.
Fuel Level Gauge
The fuel level gauge is connected to a fuel sensor unit in the fuel tank.
There is only one sensor even if the vehicle is equipped with dual
tanks.
Voltmeter Gauge (Basic Level Cluster Only)
The voltmeter gauge shows the battery voltage. The voltmeter gauge is
included only in the basic level instrument cluster. Battery voltage is
displayed in the DID for the mid and high level instrument clusters.
Intake Manifold Pressure Gauge (High Level Cluster Only)
The intake manifold pressure gauge indicates intake manifold pressure
to the engine. The pressure generated by the intake manifold pressure
should be the same at a given engine temperature, speed and load.
Intake manifold pressure will vary for different engines and vehicle
models. By monitoring the gauge, the operator can avoid engine
problems.
Application Air Pressure Gauge (High Level Cluster Only)
Air gauges are connected to the air brake system via sensors. They will
indicate the brake application pressure from either the front, rear or
trailer circuit pressure. The gauge will not register air pressure until the
foot brake pedal is depressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.
77
vn-vhd.bk Page 78 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exhaust Pyrometer Gauge (High Level Cluster Only)
The exhaust pyrometer gauge indicates the exhaust temperature,
which helps the operator get the best efficiency from the engine.
Variations in engine load can cause the exhaust temperature to vary.
For example, high exhaust gas temperature is the result of prolonged
engine lugging or over-fueling. If the pyrometer reading shows that
exhaust temperature exceeds normal, reduce fuel to the engine until
the exhaust temperature is reduced. Shift to a lower gear if the engine
is overloaded.
3. Trailer Air Supply Valve
The trailer air supply valve is a red octagonally-shaped knob. Pull the
knob to apply the trailer emergency brakes. Push the knob to
pressurize the trailer air reservoir and release the trailer emergency
brakes. The trailer air supply valve should not be used for parking. For
additional information about the trailer air supply valve, refer to “Parking
Brake/Trailer Supply Valves” on page 321.
4. Tractor Parking Brake Valve
The tractor parking brake valve is a yellow diamond-shaped knob. Pull
the knob to apply the tractor parking brakes. Push the knob to release
the tractor parking brakes. The tractor parking brake valve applies the
tractor parking brakes and the trailer brakes, if equipped. For additional
information about the tractor parking brake valve, refer to “Parking
Brake/Trailer Supply Valves” on page 321.
78
vn-vhd.bk Page 79 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
5. Inter-Wheel Differential Lock
The inter-wheel differential lock eliminates one-wheel spin-out on
slippery surfaces and improves traction. The switch has a safety latch
to prevent accidental engagement.
Inter-Wheel Differential Lock
When the lock is engaged, a tell-tale lights up in the instrument cluster.
Inter-Wheel Tell-Tale
A differential lock should only be used on a slippery surface, NOT when
driving on good road conditions. If a differential lock tell-tale is activated
in the instrument cluster, DO NOT make turns until the tell-tale has
gone out. Refer to “AXLES” on page 389 for information on how to
properly engage and drive with differential locks engaged.
79
vn-vhd.bk Page 80 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
6. Inter-Axle Differential Lock
The inter-axle differential lock eliminates slipping between axles to
improve traction. The switch has a safety latch to prevent accidental
engagement.
Inter-Axle Differential Lock
When the lock is engaged, a tell-tale lights up in the instrument cluster.
Inter-Axle Tell-Tale
A differential lock should only be used on a slippery surface, NOT when
driving on good road conditions. If a differential lock tell-tale is activated
in the instrument cluster, DO NOT make turns until the tell-tale has
gone out. Refer to “AXLES” on page 389 for information on how to
properly engage and drive with differential locks engaged.
80
vn-vhd.bk Page 81 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
7. Idle Management Indicator Lamp (CUMMINS ISX ICON)
For more information on this lamp, please refer to your vendor engine
manual supplied with this vehicle.
OR
Electronically Controlled Suspension (ECS) (ON/OFF)
This is a switch that is defined by the body builder.
OR
Lift Axle
The vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary lift axles. The lift
mechanism operates with air pressure. Press the top part of the switch
to raise the axle and press the lower part of the switch to lower the
axle. For information about lift axles, refer to “AXLES” on page 389.
Pusher Axle
81
vn-vhd.bk Page 82 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Tag Axle
OR
Optional Switch
8. Electronically Controlled Suspension (ECS) (Up/Down)
This is the switch that is defined by the body builder.
OR
82
vn-vhd.bk Page 83 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Lift Axle
The vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary lift axles. The lift
mechanism operates with air pressure. Press the top part of the switch
to raise the axle and press the lower part of the switch to lower the
axle. For information about lift axles, refer to “AXLES” on page 389.
Pusher Axle
Tag Axle
OR
Optional Switch
83
vn-vhd.bk Page 84 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
9. Auxiliary Switches
Generic switches are available for auxiliary functions that are installed
by the customer. These switches can be purchased from your
authorized Volvo Truck dealer.
Auxiliary Switch
10. Temp-A-Start (TAS) Indicator Lamps
For more information on this lamp, refer to the operator information that
is supplied with this vehicle.
OR
84
vn-vhd.bk Page 85 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Auxiliary Switch
Generic switches are available for auxiliary functions that are installed
by the customer. These switches can be purchased from your
authorized Volvo Truck dealer.
Auxiliary Switch
11. Temp-A-Start (TAS) Indicator Lamps (On/Off)
For more information on this lamp, refer to the operator information that
is supplied with this vehicle.
OR
85
vn-vhd.bk Page 86 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Lift Axle
The vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary lift axles. The lift
mechanism operates with air pressure. Press the top part of the switch
to raise the axle and press the lower part of the switch to lower the
axle. For information about lift axles, refer to “AXLES” on page 389.
Pusher Axle
Tag Axle
OR
86
vn-vhd.bk Page 87 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Auxiliary Switches
Generic switches are available for auxiliary functions that are installed
by the customer. These switches can be purchased from your
authorized Volvo Truck dealer.
Auxiliary Switch
12. and 13. Secondary Gauge Cluster
The secondary gauge is an optional feature, which is available only
with the Mid and High level instrument clusters. The instrument cluster
receives temperature information from the datalink and then passes
the information to the secondary gauge for viewing.
87
vn-vhd.bk Page 88 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Engine/Transmission
Temperature Gauge
2. Front/Rear Axle Temperature
Gauge
14. Engine Brake
For more information about the engine brake, see “Volvo Engine Brake
I-VEB” on page 116.
OR
88
vn-vhd.bk Page 89 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
I-Shift Eco-Roll
For more information on this feature, please refer to the I-Shift
Transmission Manual supplied with your vehicle.
15. Engine Brake Mode Select (ISX)
For more information about the engine brake, see “Volvo Engine Brake
I-VEB” on page 116.
OR
89
vn-vhd.bk Page 90 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
I-Shift Hill Start Assist
For more information on this feature, please refer to the I-Shift
Transmission Manual supplied with your vehicle.
OR
Optional Switch
16. Fifth Wheel Touch Lock
Activation of the kingpin lock release switch ONLY
unlocks the kingpin latch mechanism. To relock
the latch mechanism, you MUST pull forward and
then back up to re-engage the kingpin lock
mechanism. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in separation of the trailer from the
tractor causing personal injury or death.
90
vn-vhd.bk Page 91 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
앫
Park the vehicle and apply parking brake for tractor trailer.
앫
Put gearshift in neutral and chock trailer wheels.
앫
Lower trailer landing gear to ground.
앫
Disconnect air/electric lines to trailer.
앫
To release the fifth wheel kingpin lock, push the switch up. This
will release the locking mechanism. Once activated, the switch
will not relock the fifth wheel kingpin locking mechanism.
앫
Release parking brake and drive tractor 12 inches away from the
kingpin.
앫
Deflate air suspension by pressing bottom of suspension switch.
앫
After suspension lowers, pull clear of trailer and reinflate
suspension. See “Trailer Coupling Procedures” on page 360.
앫
The fifth wheel kingpin lock will only relock if you follow the
complete recoupling procedures. See “Trailer Coupling
Procedures” on page 360.
For more information, refer to “FIFTH WHEEL INSTRUCTIONS” on
page 354.
OR
Transmission Retarder
For more information about the transmission retarder, see
“Transmission Retarder, VHD Only” on page 334.
91
vn-vhd.bk Page 92 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
17. Marker Interrupt Switch
This switch interrupts power to the marker lights when held down.
When released, it springs back to the ON position and returns power to
the marker lights.
Marker Interrupt Switch
OR
92
vn-vhd.bk Page 93 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Secondary Gauge Cluster
The secondary gauge is an optional feature, which is available only
with the Mid and High level instrument clusters. The instrument cluster
receives temperature information from the datalink and then passes
the information to the secondary gauge for viewing.
1. Engine/Transmission
Temperature Gauge
2. Front/Rear Axle Temperature
Gauge
93
vn-vhd.bk Page 94 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
18. Secondary Gauge Cluster
The secondary gauge is an optional feature, which is available only
with the Mid and High level instrument clusters. The instrument cluster
receives temperature information from the datalink and then passes
the information to the secondary gauge for viewing.
1. Engine/Transmission
Temperature Gauge
OR
Optional Switch
94
2. Front/Rear Axle Temperature
Gauge
vn-vhd.bk Page 95 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
19. Traction Control Shut-Off Switch (TCS)
If the vehicle is equipped with a Traction Control System (TCS), the
switch can be used to disable the traction control feature, and therefore
increase wheel spin. This may be useful for decreasing the chances of
getting bogged down when driving in heavy snow, slush or muddy
conditions. Refer to Volvo Exhaust Brake for more information.
Traction Control Switch
95
vn-vhd.bk Page 96 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
20. Suspension Dump Switch
The vehicle must never be driven with the air springs
deflated. Damage to air suspension parts will occur if
springs are not inflated properly.
Vehicles with rear air suspension have a control for deflating the air
springs. Use this feature when uncoupling from trailers. See “Trailer
Coupling Procedures” on page 360 for correct operation when
uncoupling.
Suspension Dump Switch
The suspension dump switch has a safety latch to prevent accidental
engagement. Depress the latch and press in the bottom part of the
switch to deflate the air springs. A tell-tale in the instrument cluster will
light up when the switch is in the ON position.
This switch controls a chassis-mounted electric over air solenoid valve.
When the switch is rocked down to the ON position and the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position, the solenoid valve will no longer
have power and the suspension will inflate.
96
vn-vhd.bk Page 97 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
21. Fifth Wheel Slide Switch
The release must never be operated while the
vehicle is operating on the road. Fifth wheel
position adjustment must only be done when
stationary. Damage to the fifth wheel, trailer
kingpin and slider may occur if not operated
properly and may lead to an accident, causing
serious personal injury or death.
The sliding fifth wheel uses an air-operated release mechanism and is
used for distributing loads more favorably between the front and rear
axles to comply with varying state and provincial laws. Depress the
latch and press in the bottom part of the switch to release the slider
locks. See “Operating the Fifth Wheel Slider” on page 379 for correct
operation.
Sliding Fifth Wheel Switch
97
vn-vhd.bk Page 98 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
OR
Engine Air Control Switch
The engine fresh air control switch controls air flow to the engine air
cleaner. In the normal OFF position, air is pulled through the side hood
vent, and into the air cleaner. In the ON position, air is pulled from
within the engine compartment into the air cleaner. This feature is
useful for keeping out cold air or snow for example, when using a snow
plow.
Engine Air Control Switch
22. Air Vent
For information about air vents, refer to “Fresh Air Vent” on page 156.
23. Radio
For information about the radio, refer to the radio operating instructions
manual.
24. – 28. Cab Climate Controls
For information about cab climate controls, refer to “CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEMS” on page 118.
98
vn-vhd.bk Page 99 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
29. Trailer Hand Brake Control
The trailer hand brake control engages the trailer brakes. For
information about the trailer hand brake control, refer to “Trailer Brake
Hand Control” on page 327.
30. Passenger Window Control Switch or Optional Switch
Passenger Window Control Switch-
31. Water-In-Fuel (Purge Switch) (Optional)
The water-in-fuel drain switch is a non-locking switch used to drain the
fuel water separator on Volvo engines.
Water-In-Fuel Drain Switch
99
vn-vhd.bk Page 100 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
A symbol displayed in the instrument panel indicates when it is
recommended to drain the water separator.
Water-In-Fuel Symbol
Stop at the first opportunity and drain the water separator. If the
warning symbol frequently recommends that the water separator be
drained, then there is a problem with the fuel quality. Drain the fuel tank
and refill with fuel of the correct quality.
Draining Procedure
If the engine is started before draining is complete, the
process is interrupted.
1.
Stop the vehicle.
2.
Apply the parking brake.
3.
Turn off the engine.
4.
Place a container under the water separator.
5.
Turn the ignition key counterclockwise to the “Radio, Accessories”
position.
6.
If the vehicle is equipped with a Basic Instrument Cluster, press
the Water-In-Fuel Drain Switch.
100
vn-vhd.bk Page 101 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
7.
If the vehicle is equipped with a Mid or High Level Instrument
Cluster, select “Vehicle Setting”/“Drain Water in Fuel” in the Driver
Information Display menu. Press Enter ( ) to request draining.
The following menu is displayed.
8.
Wait until the water has stopped draining.
9.
Empty the container in a place where the contents will not cause
environmental damage.
32. AUX/USB Port
AUX/USB Port
101
vn-vhd.bk Page 102 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
앫
AUX Port — Use this port to have audio from any unit played over
the vehicle audio system.
앫
USB Port — Insert a memory stick, with MP3 music downloaded,
and the music will be heard from the vehicle audio system. The
music can be controlled with the radio or steering wheel features
(if equipped). You can also use this port with the USB style MP3
players.
앫
AUX and USB together — Use both ports together for IPOD
control. A special cable is required for this function. Once the
IPOD is connected, it will display a Volvo logo on the IPOD
screen and will let you know that the IPOD can now be controlled
by the radio or steering wheel features (if equipped). At this point,
the IPOD can be stored out of sight. This port will also charge the
IPOD.
For more information on the AUX/USB port, please refer to the radio
manual that is supplied with your vehicle.
OR
Optional Switch
102
vn-vhd.bk Page 103 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
33. Sleeper Fan Speed Switch
The sleeper fan switch located in the dash, controls the sleeper fan
speed. The switch in the sleeper control module performs the same
function as the dash switch. Press the top part of the switch to increase
the fan speed, press the lower part to decrease fan speed.
Sleeper Fan Speed Switch
OR
103
vn-vhd.bk Page 104 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Snow Plow Lamps
Vehicles specified with this option have the following:
앫
Turn ON low beam snow plow headlamps.
앫
Turn OFF main headlamps, high beam, fog and driving lights.
앫
In driving mode, DRL remains ON.
앫
Snow plow direction indicators are available.
Snow Plow Switch
34. Beacon Lamps Switch
Beacon Lamps Switch
104
vn-vhd.bk Page 105 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
OR
Optional Switch
35. Back of Cab Light Switch (Optional)
To activate the back of cab light, press the bottom part of the switch.
The light will stay on until the switch is turned to the OFF position. Back
of cab lights are available as a flush-mounted light in the middle of the
cab rear wall or as a high-mounted light on the side of the cab.
Back of Cab Light Switch
36. Optional Switch
37. Power Take-Off
For information about the PTO, refer to “Power Take-Off (PTO)” on
page 110.
OR
Optional Switch
105
vn-vhd.bk Page 106 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
38. Sleeper Overhead Bunk Lamp
This switch operates the overhead lighting in the VN sleeper cabs. It is
situated on the left-hand side of the dash to allow access to the switch
without entering the sleeper section of the cab. Press the bottom of the
switch to turn the light ON, press the top of the switch to turn the light
OFF.
The switch works together with the switch on the sleeper control panel.
Sleeper Overhead Bunk Lamp
OR
Passenger Side Mirror IN/OUT
Passenger Side Mirror Switch
106
vn-vhd.bk Page 107 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
OR
Power Take-Off
For information about the PTO, refer to “Power Take-Off (PTO)” on
page 110.
39. Side Mirror Heat
Side Mirror Heat Switch
OR
Power Take-Off
For information about the PTO, refer to “Power Take-Off (PTO)” on
page 110.
107
vn-vhd.bk Page 108 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
40. AC Inverter 120 V
Inverter Switch
For information about the inverter, refer to “Inverter Switch — 12 V DC
to 120 V AC” on page 164.
41. Optional Switch
42. Optional Switch
43. Power Outlet
For information about power outlets, refer to “12 Volt Power Outlets” on
page 161.
108
vn-vhd.bk Page 109 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
44. Microphone
Microphone
The microphone is located above the driver in the headliner. It is
available on the Mid-Level radio with Blue Tooth/Hands free option.
This is what is used to talk into when the phone is connected to the
truck. For more information on the microphone, please refer to the
Radio Manual that is supplied with the vehicle.
109
vn-vhd.bk Page 110 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
DASH SWITCHES
Power Take-Off (PTO)
There are two basic types of PTOs available: engine-mounted and
transmission-mounted.
The transmission-mounted PTO is clutch dependent, which means
that operation can be regulated by depressing or releasing the clutch
pedal. This PTO should NOT be in use while driving.
The engine-mounted PTO is direct-mounted to the engine and is
engaged with a bypass valve operated by the switch. This PTO can be
in use while driving.
It is important to only engage the switch when the PTO
is required. Leaving the PTO pump engaged when not
needed can lead to poor performance and pump
damage.
Transmission-Mounted PTO
The transmission-mounted PTO is clutch dependent, which means that
operation can be regulated by depressing or releasing the clutch pedal.
This PTO should NOT be in use while driving.
Engage the PTO by depressing the clutch pedal and pressing in the
bottom part of the switch. Release the clutch pedal to start the PTO.
One or two PTOs can be run at the same time. Applications change
depending on customer needs and components.
110
vn-vhd.bk Page 111 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Engine-Mounted PTO VN, VHD
The engine should be running at low idle and the vehicle should be
stopped or running at very low speed before engaging power take-off.
Engage the PTO by depressing the locking tab and at the same time,
depressing the main part of the switch. The PTO is now in operation
and hydraulic flow can be regulated by the engine speed.
Front Engine-Mounted PTO VHD
The switch legend shown denotes a front engine (crankshaft) driven
PTO. This PTO is clutch independent and may be used while the
vehicle is in motion.
111
vn-vhd.bk Page 112 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
PTO Speed Adjustment
Engage the PTO before adjusting the speed. For the PTO speed
adjustment to function, the Cruise Control or idle adjust cannot be
active, brake and clutch pedals must be released, and vehicle speed
must be under approximately 8 km/h (5 mph).
To set engine speed:
1.
Set the PTO/CC switch in the ON position.
2.
Depending on configuration, the engine speed may automatically
be selected when the PTO dash switch is activated (Volvo engines
only).
3.
If NOT, then
112
a.
Volvo engines: Press the RESUME button to achieve the
preset PTO engine speed. Alternatively, the accelerator
pedal can be used to achieve the desired engine speed, and
press SET+ or SET− to hold that speed
b.
Cummins engines: Press either the RESUME, SET+, or
the RESUME and SET+ buttons simultaneously to achieve
one of three possible preset speeds.
vn-vhd.bk Page 113 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To increase/decrease engine speed:
1.
Volvo engines: Press and release the SET+ or SET− toggle
switch to increase/decrease speed in increments (increment size
depends on programmed value).
2.
Cummins engines: Press and hold the SET+ or SET− toggle
switch to increase/decrease speed. When the switch is released,
the engine speed sets at current speed.
To deactivate PTO speed function:
1.
Set the PTO/CC switch to the OFF position.
or
2.
Depress the service brake pedal.
or
3.
Depress the clutch pedal (Programmable).
or
4.
Increase vehicle speed above PTO working range (typically 8
km/h [5 mph]).
Engine Brake
When operating your tractor bobtail (without a
trailer) or on slippery roads, the engine brake
switch must be in the OFF position. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.
113
vn-vhd.bk Page 114 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
A vehicle speed retarding device is not intended to
replace the service brake system on your vehicle
nor intended to bring your vehicle to a stop. A
vehicle speed retarding device is only intended to
retard the speed of your vehicle under certain
conditions.
Using the retarding device as a brake could result
in loss of vehicle control and personal injury or
death.
It is normal for a slight delay to occur in the application
of a vehicle speed retarding device. When using a
device of this type, be sure to think ahead and analyze
conditions in order to use the device properly.
Several types of engine brakes can be installed or are standard on
certain engines. All are used to reduce wear on the vehicle brake
linings.
114
vn-vhd.bk Page 115 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Volvo Variable Geometry Turbo Brake VN, VHD
The variable geometry turbo brake is standard equipment on the Volvo
11F and 13F engines. Software is used to close the variable geometry
turbocharger, creating retardation. The switch for exhaust brake has
two positions: ON/OFF.
115
vn-vhd.bk Page 116 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Volvo Engine Brake I-VEB
The Volvo Engine Brake (I-VEB) works together with the variable
geometry turbocharger to provide retarding horsepower at low engine
rpm. The I-VEB is standard equipment on the Volvo 16F engine and
optional on the 13F and 11F engines. The I-VEB has a six position
control located on the steering column, just forward of the wiper stalk.
I-VEB Control Positions
앫
O = Off
앫
A = Engine Brake Cruise Control — In this position when Cruise
Control is enabled and vehicle speed exceeds the set cruise
speed, the I-VEB will engage with infinite control (within the limits
of the engine brake) to maintain that speed.
앫
1 = 40% Engine Braking
앫
2 = 70% Engine Braking
앫
3 = 100% Engine Braking
앫
B = I-Shift Brake Program — When ordered in conjunction with
the Volvo I-Shift Transmission, the controls are integrated.
116
vn-vhd.bk Page 117 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Cummins ISX Intebrake
Standard: Two dash switches control the 3-level engine brake; the left
dash switch controls ON/OFF, the right dash switch controls
LOW/MED/HIGH.
117
vn-vhd.bk Page 118 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Optional: A 6-level retarder stalk switch mounted to the right of the
steering column. An ON/OFF switch at the end of the stalk lever
enables/disables the engine brake.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS
There are two different air conditioning systems. Depending on your
vehicle, you will have one of these two air conditioning units installed:
1.
Electronic Climate Control (EEC)
2.
Manual Climate Control (MCC)
For both climate control systems (ECC and MCC),
after a pre-determined number of “vehicle starts”
the climate unit will recalibrate the door positions,
which may take several seconds before the airflow
returns to the selected distribution mode.
118
vn-vhd.bk Page 119 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONIC CLIMATE CONTROL
(ECC)
ECC Controls
1. AC OFF button: turns the air
conditioning OFF. The arrow
in the illustration shows the
LED light which is AMBER or
RED indicating the AC
compressor is OFF. The ECC
will still try to maintain the
selected temperature in the
cab without the compressor.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Temperature Knob
Fan Speed Knob
Recirculation Button
Air Distribution Knob
119
vn-vhd.bk Page 120 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Recirculation
Press recirculation to circulate the air in the cab. Only a small amount
of air is taken directly from outside.
The light in the button comes on when the button is pressed for air
recirculation.
Temperature Control Settings ECC
Maximum Cold Setting
The temperature knob should be set to the far left. The fan speed knob
should be set to AUTO and the air distribution knob should be on
AUTO.
Maximum Heat Setting
The temperature knob should be set to the far right. The fan speed
knob should be set to AUTO and the air distribution knob should be on
AUTO.
Normal Setting
앫
When the temperature control is set to any temperature between
18°C and 27°C (64°F and 80°F), the ECC automatically adjusts
itself close to the selected temperature, similar to a thermostat.
Fan Speed
The fan speeds are 1 through 4. The fan will not operate when “0” is
selected, but air will flow when set to fresh air mode due to ram air
effect when the truck is moving.
앫
The ECC automatically circulates air at fan speed 4 when there is
a big difference between the selected temperature and the
temperature measured by the in-cab sensor. However, as the
temperature in the cab gets closer to the selected temperature,
the fan speed begins to slow down.
앫
If maximum cold or maximum heat are selected, the ECC
automatically circulates air at fan speed 4 when AUT is selected.
At any other selected fan speed the system adjusts and conforms
to the chosen speed.
120
vn-vhd.bk Page 121 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Mist and Ice Removal
DO NOT attempt to drive with the windshield
covered by mist, or fog or frost. The visibility is
reduced, which could lead to an accident causing
severe personal injury or death.
1.
Turn knob to defrost.
2.
Rotate the temperature knob to add heat as necessary.
3.
Set the fan speed knob to maximum (the extreme right).
Use these instructions to keep the windshield clear at all times.
Maximum heat output for fast defrosting can only happen after the
engine has reached operating temperature.
While driving in extreme cold, adding heat to the windshield may
change drifting snow to ice, in this case, setting the air distribution to
floor and/or panel only may allow the drifting snow to be brushed off
by the windshield wiper.
Clean the inside of the window using normal window cleaner in order to
minimize the risk of misting. Clean more often if a passenger smokes in
the cab.
121
vn-vhd.bk Page 122 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ECC Air Distribution
1. Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor shown in the illustration,
detects the temperature in the cab. DO NOT cover the
sensor, and DO NOT place warm objects, like coffee
makers or refrigerators, close to the sensor.
Always allow the dashboard vents (see arrows in illustration) to remain
open. Irrespective of how the air distribution is set, a small amount of
air will always come from the dashboard vents to ensure the
temperature in the cab is correct.
Floor Mode: Unheated air is leaked to the panel vent
to balance the heat rising from the floor.
122
vn-vhd.bk Page 123 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
AIR CONDITIONING MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
(MCC)
One difference in the Manual Climate Control unit is the AC ON button.
MCC Controls
1. AC ON button turns the air
conditioning ON.
2. Temperature Control Knob
3. Fan Speed Knob
4. Recirculation Button
5. Air Distribution Knob
The LED light is green when the AC button is
depressed.
When the AC ON button is NOT depressed and the
compressor or AC is heard, this is not a fault in the
system. The AC will operate in defrost mode whether
the AC ON button is depressed or not.
123
vn-vhd.bk Page 124 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Recirculation
Press recirculation to circulate the air in the cab. Only a small amount
of air is taken directly from outside.
The light in the button comes on when the button is pressed for air
recirculation.
Temperature Control Settings MCC
Cool and Hot Temperature Settings
Move the knob to the blue bar for cool air to circulate in the cab, and to
the red bar for warm to hot air to circulate in the cab. Select the desired
fan speed starting from 1 to 4. “0” is not a fan speed.
Mist and Ice Removal
DO NOT attempt to drive with the windshield
covered by mist, or fog or frost. The visibility is
reduced, which could lead to an accident causing
severe personal injury or death.
1.
Turn knob to defrost.
2.
Rotate the temperature knob to add heat as necessary.
3.
Set the fan to maximum (the extreme right).
Use these instructions to keep the windshield clear at all times.
Maximum heat output for fast defrosting can only happen after the
engine has reached operating temperature.
While driving in extreme cold, adding heat to the windshield may
change drifting snow to ice, in this case, setting the air distribution to
floor and/or panel only may allow the drifting snow to be brushed off
by the windshield wiper.
Clean the inside of the window using normal window cleaner in order to
minimize the risk of misting. Clean more often if a passenger smokes in
the cab.
124
vn-vhd.bk Page 125 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
MCC Air Distribution
Always allow the dashboard vents (see arrows in illustration) to remain
open. Irrespective of how the air distribution is set, a small amount of
air will always come from the dashboard vents to ensure the
temperature in the cab is correct.
Floor Mode: Unheated air is leaked to the panel vent
to balance the heat rising from the floor.
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its content are
known to the state of California to cause cancer,
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
125
vn-vhd.bk Page 126 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If at any time there is any question whether fumes are entering the cab,
determine the cause of the fumes and have it corrected as soon as
possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive
only with all windows open.
Protect against carbon monoxide entry into the cab. Keep the engine
exhaust system, cab and cab ventilation system properly maintained. It
is recommended that the exhaust system and cab are inspected by a
competent technician:
앫
At every engine oil change.
앫
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system.
앫
Whenever the exhaust system, underbody or cab is damaged.
To allow proper operation of the vehicle ventilation system, keep the
inlet grille at the base of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves and
other obstructions at all times.
DO NOT park the vehicle and let the engine run or idle for more than
10 minutes with the ventilation system control switch in the OFF
position. Even with the ventilation system ON, running the engine while
parked or stopped for long periods of time is not recommended. Entry
of carbon monoxide into the cab is possible with a poorly repaired,
damaged or corroded exhaust system or cab.
DO NOT run the engine in confined areas, such as garages or next to a
building, any more than necessary. The area must be properly
ventilated. When the vehicle must be stopped with the engine running
for more than a few minutes:
앫
Adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the
cab. Do this by setting the fan to medium or high speed and with
the controls set in any position except for recirculation of air inside
of the cab.
앫
Keep the exhaust pipe area clear to help reduce the buildup of
exhaust gas under the vehicle.
126
vn-vhd.bk Page 127 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SLEEPER CLIMATE UNIT
The sleeper cabs have an A/C and heater unit that is located in the
passenger side luggage compartment. The sleeper unit operates from
the same heater and air conditioning supply as the main unit. The
heater can be operated independently from the main unit as long as
the engine is running.
For the air conditioning to operate, the engine must be running, the air
conditioning button must be pressed in and the fan control must be set
at least for speed 1 on the main control panel.
Air is taken from the sleeper area through a filter in the lower bunk
support wall and heated or cooled in the “underbunk” unit. Outlet air
can be directed with the vents in the side walls.
For the best results when using the air conditioning, direct the air flow
upward in the sleeper area.
127
vn-vhd.bk Page 128 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
LIGHT CONTROL PANEL
Exterior lighting is controlled through the light control panel. The rotary
knob controls the parking lights, headlights, and the optional fog and
driving lights. The panel also has a dimmer control switch and hazard
switch.
1. Off
2. Parking Lights
3. Headlights
128
4. Fog and Driving Lights
(Optional)
5. Hazard Lights
6. Dimmer Control
vn-vhd.bk Page 129 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Fog and Driving Lights
Fog and driving lights are wired so they are turned on only when the
headlight control is on. Fog lights are used with the low beam
headlights. Driving lights are used with the high beam headlights.
Switching from low to high beam will automatically switch from fog
lights to driving lights. Driving and fog lights should be used when
driving conditions require additional lighting. The driving or fog lights
should NOT be used in traffic where they might distract other drivers
thereby creating a safety hazard.
VNM Fog and Driving Lights
129
vn-vhd.bk Page 130 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VNL Fog and Driving Lights
130
vn-vhd.bk Page 131 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SLEEPER CONTROL PANEL (SLEEPER MODELS
ONLY)
The sleeper control module is located behind the driver’s seat. It
provides precise temperature control to the sleeper unit. There are
separate temperature and fan control systems for the sleeper and the
cab area. Also, the driver can control the fan speed in the sleeper using
a control switch on the dash.
131
vn-vhd.bk Page 132 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Panel in VN 730 and 780
2. Panel in VN 430, 630, 670
and VHD 430
3. Panel in VN 430 and
VHD 430 (optional)
This dual control usage provides optimum comfort to the driver and
passenger (if any) in both compartments. The sleeper control module
is used to operate the following:
앫
Auxiliary Heating, Venting and Air Conditioning
앫
Alarm Clock/Timer
앫
Interior Sleeper Lights
앫
Circuit Protection (fuses)
앫
Battery Voltage Protection (see “Battery Voltage Protection
System” on page 467)
앫
Parking Heater (Optional)
132
vn-vhd.bk Page 133 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Sleeper Controls
1. Overhead Lamp Switch: This
can be controlled from the
sleeper control module or
from the dash rocker switch.
2. Speaker: Sounds when the
alarm or timer goes off, or
when entering battery
protection mode.
3. Display Screen: Displays
selected information.
4. Menu Control Buttons: These
buttons are used to make
selections in the display
screen.
5. Temperature Control Knob:
Controls temperature for the
Parking Heater and the
Auxiliary Heating, Venting
and Air Conditioning
(A-HVAC).
6. Fuses
7. Fan Speed Control and
Battery Protection Override
Switch: This can be controlled
from the sleeper control
module or from the dash
rocker switch.
8. LED: The LED illuminates
when the fan is on. The LED
also flashes when it is in
battery protection mode.
133
vn-vhd.bk Page 134 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Display Screen
The display screen contains LED icons for HEAT, SET, IDLE, TIMER,
°F, °C, AM, PM and ALARM. Press the Menu/Snooze bar to rotate
through TIME DISPLAY, ALARM, HEAT and TIMER menus.
After 5 minutes of inactivity the display will shut off.
Underneath the display screen there are five push buttons:
SET — Establishes values and confirms any selection made
ON/OFF — Turns ALARM, TIMER or DISPLAY ON/OFF
134
vn-vhd.bk Page 135 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
+ — Adds increments
− — Reduces increments
Press and hold down the +/− button for rapid advance.
Menu/Snooze Bar — Pressing the Menu/Snooze bar moves you
through TIME DISPLAY, ALARM, HEAT and TIMER menus in the
display screen.
Snooze Function — Pressing Snooze disables the buzzer for seven
minutes (when the alarm or timer is on). (From a sub menu) Pressing
Snooze can be used to exit the menu, without saving the value.
Snooze turns off the TIMER for 7 minutes.
135
vn-vhd.bk Page 136 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Setting Display Time/Clock
Press MENU/SNOOZE to toggle between TIME
DISPLAY, ALARM, HEAT and TIMER menus until
desired icon is displayed.
Press the SET button. The SET indicator comes on. Choose 24 hr or
12 hr format by pressing either the + or − buttons. Press SET again.
The hour digits are flashing. Set the time to the desired hour by
pressing + or − buttons. Press SET.
The minute digits are flashing. Set time to the desired minute by
pressing + or − buttons. Press SET.
The SET indicator disappears.
The Time is set.
After 7 seconds of inactivity, the Time/Clock setting
returns to the time display screen. Press the SET
button to restart.
136
vn-vhd.bk Page 137 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Only 12 hr format shows AM/PM symbols.
Setting Alarm
Press MENU/SNOOZE to toggle between TIME
DISPLAY, ALARM, HEAT and TIMER menus until
desired icon is displayed.
Press the ON/OFF button to set ALARM ON or OFF.
Press the SET button to set the time. SET is displayed on the screen.
The hour digits are flashing. Set the desired hour by pressing the + or −
buttons. Press SET again to confirm selection.
The minute digits are flashing. Set the desired minutes by pressing the
+ or − buttons. Press SET again to confirm selection.
The ALARM indicator remains on and the SET indicator disappears.
137
vn-vhd.bk Page 138 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The Alarm is set.
After 7 seconds of inactivity, the Time/Clock setting
returns to the time display screen. Press the SET
button to restart.
Setting Parking Heater
Press MENU/SNOOZE to toggle between TIME
DISPLAY, ALARM, HEAT and TIMER menus until
desired icon is displayed.
Press ON/OFF button to immediately turn on the Manual HEAT.
Press SET to select three different modes and time. SET is displayed
at the top left of the display screen.
Press the + or − buttons to toggle between HEAT/AUTO/CYCL.
HEAT: Manually turn ON and OFF.
AUTO: Set a time in the future to automatically turn on.
138
vn-vhd.bk Page 139 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CYCL: Set one time to continuously cycle between ON and OFF.
When the selection is complete, for example, select AUTO and press
SET. Current ON or OFF status is displayed. Make desired selection
by pressing ON/OFF button. Press SET.
Hour digits flashing. Press the + or − buttons to select the desired
hour. Press SET, the hour is set.
Minute digits flashing. Press the + or − buttons to select the desired
minutes. Press SET, the minute is set.
The SET indicator at the top left of the display screen disappears. The
HEAT indicator remains at the top left of the display screen.
The Automatic Heater is set.
After 7 seconds of inactivity, the Time/Clock setting
returns to the time display screen. Press the SET
button to restart.
139
vn-vhd.bk Page 140 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Setting Timer
Press MENU/SNOOZE to toggle between TIME
DISPLAY, ALARM, HEAT and TIMER menus until
desired icon is displayed.
The display will flash between the ON/OFF and the TIMER value.
Press ON/OFF button to select ON or OFF status (when TIMER value
is not 0:00).
Press SET to select time.
SET is displayed on the display screen.
The Minute digits are flashing. Press + or − buttons to select desired
minute. Press SET to confirm selection.
The Seconds digits are flashing. Press + or − buttons to select desired
seconds. Press SET to confirm selection.
The SET indicator disappears, TIMER remains at the bottom left of the
display, and the menu returns to the TIME DISPLAY. Press and hold
MENU/SNOOZE for one second to constantly display the TIMER.
140
vn-vhd.bk Page 141 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The Alarm will sound when the TIMER count reaches
0:00. Press ON/OFF button to turn OFF alarm for
TIMER.
Snooze turns off the TIMER for 7 minutes.
After 7 seconds of inactivity, the Time/Clock setting
returns to the time display screen. Press the SET
button to restart.
141
vn-vhd.bk Page 142 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
MISCELLANEOUS CAB EQUIPMENT
Cup Holders and Trash Compartment
There is a trash bin holder at the lower part of the dash. To open, press
the top part of the lid in and the lid will fold out. To close, press the lid in
until the latch closes. There are also two dash-mounted cup holders
convenient to the driver and passenger.
Trash bin: (Removable), Located below the 12 V power outlet.
1. Driver Cup Holder
2. Trash Bin
142
3. Passenger Cup Holder
vn-vhd.bk Page 143 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Sleeper cup holder:
Located on the left lower tower cabinet, for the bottom bunk. There is
another cup holder located on the left upper tower cabinet for the upper
bunk.
143
vn-vhd.bk Page 144 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Curtains
Curtains are available for all the sleeper cabs to ensure privacy and to
darken the cabin from outside light. Various configurations are
available. Curtains can cover the whole windshield area or go across
the sleeper opening.
When the curtains are not in use, they are stored out of the way and
held in place with velcro straps.
1. Windshield Curtains
2. Sleeper Curtain
3. Sleeper Window Cover
4. Sky Light Cover
Covers for the VN 670 are to be stored in a rolled-up position in the
opening behind the cabinet.
The covers for the VN 780 side windows are stored behind the
backrest cushions. All covers are put on with snap buttons that are on
the cover and window rim, with the exception of the sky light cover.
144
vn-vhd.bk Page 145 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
STEERING COLUMN
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch is located on the right side of the steering column
just under the steering wheel. Standard equipment is a normal ignition
switch.
The vehicle is delivered with 2 identical keys. If more
keys are needed, order them through your authorized
Volvo Truck dealer.
The ignition positions are:
앫
A — Radio, Accessories
앫
B — Off
앫
C — Drive
앫
D — Start
The key can only be removed when in the B or Off position. For full
starting instructions, see “STARTING THE ENGINE” on page 336.
145
vn-vhd.bk Page 146 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Make sure the ignition is in the Off position to avoid
draining the battery.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
The wiper/washer functions are operated by the same lever. The
wipers have normal and fast speeds which are activated by moving the
lever down one or two positions. To let the wipers engage for a few
passes, lightly depress the lever until the wipers start and hold it there.
The wipers return to the parking position when the lever is released.
146
vn-vhd.bk Page 147 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The interval wiper function is engaged by moving the lever up. The
normal programmed speed is one pass every 10 seconds. To shorten
the interval time, move the lever to normal wipe position and then to the
interval position again when the next wiper pass is desired. This way,
the interval can be programmed between 1 to 10 seconds between
each pass.
To operate the windshield washer, pull the lever toward the steering
wheel. If washer fluid needs to be added, use a commercially reputable
washer fluid that has good cleaning capability and does not freeze in
cold weather.
An indicator will appear in the DID when the washer fluid level is low.
See “Windshield Washer Reservoir” on page 435 for washer level
capacity. A 10 second activation delay allows for fluid slosh.
In the VNM 200 Day Cab (Short fairing) the washer
fluid indicator is NOT displayed in the instrument
cluster.
147
vn-vhd.bk Page 148 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
DO NOT try to make adjustments to the steering
wheel while the vehicle is moving. Never operate
the vehicle with the steering wheel adjusted to its
uppermost position (exiting cab position). Make all
adjustments before starting the vehicle, to prevent
loss of vehicle control, which can cause personal
injury or death.
The adjustment device is operated by a pedal on the left side of the
floor. To make adjustments, press the pedal down and move the
steering column to the desired position, then release the pedal.
148
vn-vhd.bk Page 149 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Left-Hand Controls
앫
Headlamp Interrupt (Top)
앫
Marker Interrupt (Bottom)
When either switch is pressed, the corresponding lights toggle from
their current state. If OFF they change to ON and if ON they change to
OFF. When pressed for more than 3 seconds, the lights revert
automatically to the initial state.
149
vn-vhd.bk Page 150 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Right-Hand Controls
앫
Radio controls
Press +, up or −, down to change the radio volume.
Press the switch left or right to change radio stations. The radio will
seek the next station with a strong signal.
150
vn-vhd.bk Page 151 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES
Horn Switches
Electric and air horns are standard equipment. They are both operated
from the steering wheel or center pad.
The airbag can be pressed down anywhere around the edge to engage
the air horn.
1. Air Horn
2. Electric Horn (city horn)
151
vn-vhd.bk Page 152 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The cab is equipped with separate and combined interior and reading
lights in various locations in the cab. The front seat overhead lights can
be turned on at any time using the switch in the fixture. This is a
three-way switch, pressing the lamp turns the light ON, OFF or the light
comes on with the door being opened. When the switch is in the middle
position, the light does not turn on, even when the door is opened.
Using bulbs or lamps other than those specified
may result in failures that could overheat and lead
to a fire or a vehicle accident caused by improper
lighting.
152
vn-vhd.bk Page 153 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior Lights
Chart Number
Description
1
Overhead Dome Lamp
1
Overhead Dome/Spot Lamp connected to door
2
Door Courtesy Lamp
3
Dome Lamp — Sleeper
4
Reading Lamp under bunk storage
5
Reading Lamp
6
Overhead Lamp — Short
7
Overhead Lamp — Long
8
Overhead Dome/Spot Lamp
9
Control Panel Lamp
To prevent short service lift, DO NOT touch the glass
surface of the replacement bulb.
The lamp assemblies may get warm to the touch.
DO NOT cover the lamps with any object.
Most of the vehicle interior lights are activated by pressing on a push
button on the lower end of the lamp. There are two external switches
for the interior lights, one located on the dash panel, to the immediate
left of the steering column, and the other is on the sleeper area control
panel.
153
vn-vhd.bk Page 154 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The red courtesy light comes on when the door is opened. The lens is
red to alert oncoming traffic from the rear that the door is open. It is
also used during night driving to light up the floor area and steps
without distracting the driver with a glaring light.
DO NOT use sleeves of any kind over bulbs in the
interior lamps. The bulbs may over heat causing
damage to the fixture including possible fire.
154
vn-vhd.bk Page 155 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The door latch has an internal switch that operates all door-activated
lights.
155
vn-vhd.bk Page 156 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Fresh Air Vent
A.
Closed
B.
Open
C.
Vertical Air Flow
D.
Lateral Air Flow
When heating the cab, all vents should be closed. However, the vents
on the outer parts of the dash can be used for defrosting the cab door
windows. When operating the air conditioning, all air vents should be
completely open and the air flow directed upward.
DO NOT breathe the engine exhaust gas. It
contains carbon monoxide, which has no color or
odor. Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas which
can cause unconsciousness or death.
156
vn-vhd.bk Page 157 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAB VENTILATION, SLEEPER
In sleeper versions (except the VN 780 and VN 730) there is a fresh air
vent located on each cab side wall. It opens to two positions so the air
flow can be regulated.
157
vn-vhd.bk Page 158 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The vent also opens toward the front or toward the rear. This can be
used for forcing air into the cab (open toward the front) or for venting air
out of the cab (open toward the rear).
The vent should not be used during rain, while
washing the vehicle or other circumstances where
water may enter the cab while the vent is open. To
prevent leaks, make sure the handle rollers are on the
top center part of the cams.
Earlier production versions of the VN 780 are equipped with four
hinged side windows in the sleeper area. Later production versions
have two hinged side windows in the sleeper area and two upper vent
windows.
Earlier production versions of the VN 670 have only the two upper
windows. Later production versions have two upper vent windows.
158
vn-vhd.bk Page 159 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. VN 780 and VN 670 Vent
Window
2. VN 780 Hinged Side Window
159
vn-vhd.bk Page 160 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The VN 730 is equipped with two hinged side windows in the sleeper
area.
DO NOT force the window crank mechanism in the fully open position.
The mechanism can be damaged if you try to open the window beyond
the stop position.
Make sure the windows are closed before washing the
cab. Water can enter the cab through the window
opening.
Do not open the cab sleeper windows when the
vehicle is in motion. Opening the windows while the
vehicle is in motion will damage the sleeper windows.
160
vn-vhd.bk Page 161 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
12 Volt Power Outlets
DO NOT connect a device with a current rating in
excess of 10 amps or the amount labeled.
There are a number of 12 V outlets that can be accessed in the cab.
There is a power outlet on the sleeper control panel. The outlet is
covered by a cap that is pulled out for access.
The outlet is made for 12 V accessory-type plug.
161
vn-vhd.bk Page 162 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
12 Volt Locations
There is an optional power outlet in the driver and passenger side
cabinets. Accessories for this cabinet will have ON/OFF switches of
their own.
The cabinet 12 V outlets are made for 12 V accessory-type plugs.
VN 780, VN 730
162
vn-vhd.bk Page 163 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 670, VN 630
163
vn-vhd.bk Page 164 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Inverter Switch — 12 V DC to 120 V AC
When parked on wet ground, avoid using an
external power source to connect the cab power
plug. Water is a conductor of electricity. In wet
conditions, electrical shock can occur which can
result in personal injury or death.
This switch turns ON the optional power inverter, located near the
battery compartment.
The power inverter takes the DC voltage from the batteries and
changes it to AC voltage, which is then fed to the 120 V shore power
electrical system within the cab area.
The power inverter option can be ordered only if the 120 V shore power
electrical system is specified.
164
vn-vhd.bk Page 165 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
This is a typical setup with a factory-installed inverter.
1. External Power Plug
2. Load Center
3. Inverter (if equipped)
165
vn-vhd.bk Page 166 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
A tripped circuit is usually an indication of a fault in the
circuit, or of an appliance being supplied with power.
Every effort should be made to identify and correct any
fault that exists.
120 Volt System and Outlets
When parked on wet ground, avoid using an
external power source to connect the cab power
plug. Water is a conductor of electricity. In wet
conditions, electrical shock can occur which can
result in personal injury or death.
The VN 730, 780, 670 and 630 are available with an optional 120 V AC
service, used for longer parking while still living in the vehicle. The
120 V AC service is supplied from outside sources. To hook up the
service, there is a socket located behind the driver side door.
166
vn-vhd.bk Page 167 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Power goes through a circuit breaker box located on the front wall in
the driver side luggage compartment. On the right is an ON/OFF
switch and on the left is the ground fault circuit interrupter. The controls
may also be reached from inside the cab through the hatch under the
mattress or cushion.
167
vn-vhd.bk Page 168 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
168
vn-vhd.bk Page 169 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
From the breaker box in the VN 780 and 730, power goes to the three
outlets as a standard feature. In the VN 670 and 630 models, the outlet
on the driver side lower bunk box is standard, and the tower cabinet
middle compartments (1) each have an optional outlet.
1. 120 Volt Outlet
2. External 120 Volt Receptacle
3. Circuit Breaker Box
169
vn-vhd.bk Page 170 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
120 Volt System Wiring, VN 670, VN 630
170
vn-vhd.bk Page 171 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
120 Volt System Components, VN 670, VN 630
1. 120 Volt Outlet
2. External 120 Volt Receptacle
3. Circuit Breaker Box
171
vn-vhd.bk Page 172 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Cigar Lighter
To operate the cigar lighter, press the center in until it stays in. The
heating element will heat up and pop the lighter out when it is ready for
use. The ash tray is located next to the cigar lighter.
The cigar lighter socket is optimized for use with cigar lighter heating
element. This socket should not be used as an auxiliary 12 V power
supply because there are many aftermarket power plugs available, with
different dimensions. Some of these may deform the lighter socket’s
tangs and cause it not to work properly. If an auxiliary socket is
needed, the cigar lighter assembly may be replaced with the approved
Volvo 12 V power socket.
DO NOT connect a device with a current rating in
excess of 10 amps or the amount labeled.
Using a 12 V power plug in the lighter socket may
damage the socket.
172
vn-vhd.bk Page 173 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
PARKING HEATER (OPTIONAL, SLEEPER MODELS
ONLY)
DO NOT fuel the vehicle or handle flammable
liquids in the vicinity of an operating parking
heater. The fuel vapors can be ignited, causing an
explosion or fire resulting in severe personal
injury or death.
DO NOT store flammable items close to the
parking heater or put items on top of it. Flammable
items should not be closer than 50 mm (2 inches).
The item may ignite and cause a fire resulting in
severe personal injury or death.
DO NOT run heater while vehicle is in an enclosed
area. The exhaust gasses contain carbon
monoxide (CO). If not vented to the atmosphere,
there could be a buildup of dangerous levels of CO
which may lead to unconsciousness and later
death.
173
vn-vhd.bk Page 174 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The parking heater is a very hot object. DO NOT
touch the heater when it is in operation or shortly
thereafter. Touching a heater may cause burns to
exposed skin.
The heater air inlet is located in the bunk wall in front
of the heater. DO NOT attempt to put small items or
store flat items between the bunk and the
cabinet/refrigerator. The air intake can be blocked
which causes the heater to overheat and shut down.
The parking heater is a diesel fuel burner that heats the air in the cab.
Air is taken from the cab and returned heated. Combustion air and
exhaust is taken from, and released to the outside air.
To safeguard from the heater operating after a turnover accident, there
is a fuel shut-off valve in the fuel delivery system.
174
vn-vhd.bk Page 175 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Fuel Parking Heater
The parking heater is not available if the vehicle is
equipped with a sink.
A fuel heated parking heater is available as an option. It is located in
the left-hand luggage compartment. The heater provides automatically
regulated heat that is distributed through its own vents into the sleeper
section of the cab.
175
vn-vhd.bk Page 176 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ANTENNAS
General
1.
Multiband
2.
Multiplexer (Rami)
3.
Radio AM/FM
4.
TV Antenna
Multiband Antenna
There are antennas mounted on the top of the mirror brackets for
wideband reception. They receive or send signals for radio, CB and
telephone. Each antenna carries multiple wire windings that work
together with mirror bracket devices to cover the needs of many uses.
If the antenna is damaged, replace it only with a multiband type
antenna. A regular antenna does not have the wiring necessary to give
good reception for all uses.
176
vn-vhd.bk Page 177 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Antenna Multiplexer
1. Cellular Phone Antenna
Cable
2. Radio Antenna Cable
Connection
3. Phone Cable Connection
4. CB Radio Antenna Cable
Connection
5. Antenna Connection, Right
Mirror
6. Antenna Connection, Left
Mirror
Communication signals that travel to and from the antennas go through
the antenna multiplexer. It is standard in the VN 670 and VN 780, and
optional on other models. Coaxial cables for the cellular phone, CB
radio and radio are included in the multiplexer system — all using the
same set of antennas.
177
vn-vhd.bk Page 178 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The multiplexer is accessed through the lower dash panels. Cable
routing is as shown in the illustration above. Use only genuine Volvo
replacement parts for this multiplexer system; standard antennas will
give unsatisfactory performance. The windings in the antennas are
specific to this system: different sections of the antenna are used for
the cellular phone, radio and CB.
The location of the CB may vary. CB connections can
be located either in the dash or overhead storage
area, depending on vehicle options. See
“COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT” on page 180.
TELEVISION
All items within the cab must be secured before
the vehicle is set in motion. This includes, but is
not limited to, drinks, clothes, books, televisions,
etc. In the event of a sudden stop or collision,
loose items could fly around inside the cab. This
could cause personal injury.
The VN 780, VN 730, VN 670 and VN 630 are already equipped for TV
with a pre-installed antenna. The TV should be installed in the
passenger side cabinet where there is a standard 12 V connection or
an optional 120 V connection.
To prevent the TV set from moving when the vehicle is driven, the strap
in the TV storage area should be tight around the set. Position the strap
across the front corners of the TV.
178
vn-vhd.bk Page 179 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
There is an optional television speaker available, located in the top of
the sleeper switch panel. Beside the speaker, there is a jack for
headphones. This is provided for silent viewing of the TV. When the
headset jack is plugged in, the speaker is cut out.
The TV prep kit is optional.
TV Antenna
DO NOT pierce or drill through the headliner. The TV
antenna may be damaged.
The TV antenna for the VN 780, VN 730 and VN 830 is standard
equipment.
179
vn-vhd.bk Page 180 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
CB Radio
There is an optional platform provided for a CB radio on top of the
dash. The unit is held in place with a strap which can accommodate a
variety of sizes.
The CB radio can also be mounted in the overhead storage. See
“STORAGE COMPARTMENTS” on page 182.
180
vn-vhd.bk Page 181 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Telephone
There is room on the dash for a mobile telephone. This can be hooked
up to the multiplex box.
If the vehicle is delivered with a multiplex box, the connecting end of
the telephone coaxial cable should be located at the lower dash cover.
The panel must be removed to access the cable.
Road Relay (Optional)
The Road Relay is an engine communication tool that allows the driver
to have fuel consumption, time and mileage readouts and also
programmed reminders for service intervals. The Road Relay should
be permanently mounted directly below the radio.
Collected data can be downloaded for use in a stationary computer
where the data can be collected and compared over time.
181
vn-vhd.bk Page 182 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
Heavy objects must be stored only in the outside
storage areas or secured on the floor. Cabinets
and storage compartments are designed for
clothing and lighter personal effects only. In the
event of a collision, heavy, unsecured objects in
overhead storage can come loose and cause
severe personal injury or death to the driver or
passengers.
All items within the cab must be secured before
the vehicle is set in motion. This includes, but is
not limited to, drinks, clothes, books, televisions,
etc. In the event of a collision, loose items could
fly around inside the cab. This could cause
personal injury.
DO NOT overload the cab suspension. Make sure the
weight distribution is equal in the cab. Overloading the
suspension leads to poor ride and lowered driving
comfort.
182
vn-vhd.bk Page 183 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To prevent the television and microwave oven from moving when the
vehicle is driven, the strap in the storage area should be tight around
the unit. Position the strap across the front corners of the unit.
Periodically, check that the strap is tight and retighten as necessary.
183
vn-vhd.bk Page 184 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Front Overhead Storage
There are two configurations of overhead storage compartments
mounted over the windshield: five openings with nets, or CB radio,
switch panel, and three openings with nets.
The storage compartments have a maximum storage weight limit of
approximately 1.1 kg (2.5 lb.) per opening or a total of 5.6 kg (12.5 lb.)
evenly distributed.
Five Openings with Nets
184
vn-vhd.bk Page 185 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CB Radio, Switch Panel and Three Openings with Nets
185
vn-vhd.bk Page 186 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
There are two configurations of forward overhead shelves at the front
of the sleeper: without cabinets or with cabinets. The storage
compartments have a maximum storage weight limit of approximately
3.6 kg (8 lb.) per section.
Forward Overhead Shelf without Cabinets
186
vn-vhd.bk Page 187 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Forward Overhead Shelf with Cabinets
187
vn-vhd.bk Page 188 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 780 Storage
Load Limits
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
188
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
4 kg (8.8 lb.)
15 kg (33.1 lb.) with TV, 6 kg
(13 lb.) without TV
Hang Rod (Standard) 9 kg
(19.8 lb.)
(Standard) 18 kg (39.6 lb.)
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
9. 4 kg (8.8 lb.)
10. 15 kg (33.1 lb.) with TV, 6 kg
(13 lb.) without TV
11. 4 kg (8.8 lb.)
12. 5 kg (9.9 lb.)
13. 6 kg (13.2 lb.)
14. 6 kg (13.2 lb.)
15. 45 kg (99 lb.) with refrigerator,
6.5 kg (14 lb.) without
refrigerator
vn-vhd.bk Page 189 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 780 Bunk Storage
1. Storage Bins
2. Storage Compartment
3. Storage Compartment
4. Exterior Side Storage
Compartment
189
vn-vhd.bk Page 190 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VNL 730 Storage
Load Limits
1. 6 kg (13 lb.) without
refrigerator, 45 kg (99 lb.)
equally distributed with 78 L
refrigerator
2. 6 kg (13 lb.) without
refrigerator, 45 kg (99 lb.)
equally distributed with 78 L
refrigerator
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
4 kg (8.8 lb.)
15 kg (33.1 lb.)
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
13.6 kg (30 lb.)
10 kg (22 lb.) on hanger rod
9 kg (19.8 lb.)
Do not load the sink, if equipped.
190
vn-vhd.bk Page 191 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Load Limits
1. 5 kg (9.9 lb.) with 44 L
refrigerator
2. 4 kg (8.8 lb.) if shelf, 5 kg
(9.9 lb.) if refrigerator
3.
4.
5.
6.
15 kg (33.1 lb.)
3 kg (6.6 lb.)
13.6 kg (30 lb.)
10 kg (22 lb.) on hanger rod
191
vn-vhd.bk Page 192 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Load Limits
1. 15 kg (33 lb.)
192
2. 10 kg (22 lb.)
vn-vhd.bk Page 193 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VNL 730 Bunk Storage
1. Storage Compartment
2. Storage Compartment
3. Exterior Side Storage
Compartment
193
vn-vhd.bk Page 194 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 670, 630, 430 and VHD 430 Storage
1. Lower Bunk Floor Panel
2. Release Handle
3. Restraint Cylinders
194
4. Outside Storage
Compartments
vn-vhd.bk Page 195 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SLEEPER BUNKS
General
Upper and lower bunks are available in the VN 780, 730, 670 and
630 models. The lower bunk is standard while the upper bunk is
optional. The VN 430 and VHD 430 are equipped with one lower bunk.
The bunks for the VN 670, 630, 430 and VHD 430 cover the luggage
compartment. They are hinged for access to luggage from inside of the
cab.
To gain access, release the latch mechanism and lift by the edge of the
bunk platform. Gas springs aid in opening and closing the platform in
some models.
The upper bunks for the VN 780, 670 and 630 may also be hinged
(optional), and can be raised out of the way. The VN 670 and VN 630
use the safety bunk harness latch to hold up the bunk. The VN 780 has
latches on both sides of the wall that hold the bunk in position. To
release the latches, pull the latch strap in the middle of the bunk
underside.
When the bunk is raised and latched, make sure that the latches on
both sides close and hold the bunk properly. For more information on
bunk safety restraints, see “Safety Restraint VN 430, VN 630, VN 670
and VHD 430” on page 264.
195
vn-vhd.bk Page 196 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Cushions: These can be
moved and placed to the side.
196
2. Cushions
vn-vhd.bk Page 197 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 780 Sleeper Upper Bunk
Always have three limbs (one foot and two hands
or two feet and one hand) in contact with the floor,
bunk or step at all times when entering or exiting
the upper bunk. Failure to follow this procedure
can lead to a fall and cause severe personal injury
or death.
Support the bunk with one hand while releasing
the latches. Failure to support the bunk may lead
to the bunk falling without control, causing
personal injury.
197
vn-vhd.bk Page 198 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Upper Bunk
2. Upper Bunk in Lowered
Position
198
3. Release/Pull Strap
4. Upper Bunk in Raised
Position
vn-vhd.bk Page 199 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VNL 730 Sleeper Bunk
Always have three limbs (one foot and two hands
or two feet and one hand) in contact with the floor,
bunk or step at all times when entering or exiting
the upper bunk. Failure to follow this procedure
can lead to a fall and cause severe personal injury
or death.
The VNL 730 can be equipped with a single 53-inch lower bunk, or a
42-inch lower bunk and an upper bunk. For information on bunk safety
restraints, see “Safety Restraint VN 430, VN 630, VN 670 and VHD
430” on page 264.
53-Inch Lower Bunk
199
vn-vhd.bk Page 200 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The 42-inch bunk cushions cover the luggage compartment. They can
be moved for access to luggage from inside the cab.
42-Inch Lower Bunk
1. Cushions: These can be
moved for access to the
luggage compartment.
200
2. Cushions: These can be
moved and placed to the side.
vn-vhd.bk Page 201 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The upper bunk is hinged and can be raised out of the way. The bunk is
supported by a strut on each side in the raised and lowered positions.
Use the handle in the middle of the bunk to raise and lower it.
Upper Bunk
1. Upper Bunk in Raised
Position
2. Upper Bunk in Lowered
Position
3. Support Strut
201
vn-vhd.bk Page 202 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 670, 630 42-Inch Sleeper Bunk
VN 670, 630 Lower Bunk
202
vn-vhd.bk Page 203 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Support the bunk with one hand while releasing
the latch. Failure to support the bunk may lead to
the bunk falling without control, causing personal
injury.
203
vn-vhd.bk Page 204 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 670, 630 Lower and Upper Bunks
204
vn-vhd.bk Page 205 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 670 Optional Fold Down Step
In the VN 670 sleeper there is an option on the passenger side which
offers a fold down step. See illustration.
1. Fold Down Step
2. Cabinet Grab Handle
205
vn-vhd.bk Page 206 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 670
Moveable Cushions in Lower Bunk
206
vn-vhd.bk Page 207 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 430 and VHD 430 Sleeper Bunk
1. Bunk
2. Bunk Restraints
3. Lower Bunk Restraint
Attachment Buckles
4. Tenting Buckles
207
vn-vhd.bk Page 208 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Upper Bunk Access VN 780
Always have three limbs (one foot and two hands
or two feet and one hand) in contact with the floor,
bunk or step at all times when entering or exiting
the upper bunk. Failure to follow this procedure
can lead to a fall and cause severe personal injury
or death.
Support the ladder with one hand while releasing
the lock straps. Failure to support the ladder may
lead to the ladder falling out, causing injury to leg
or foot.
Access to the upper bunk is provided by lowering foldable ladder and
securing the ladder into the floor locator (6) and retainer bracket (2) in
the upper bunk.
The ladder stored in its collapsed position behind the passenger side
cabinet. To release the ladder, unsnap the lock straps. Support the
ladder so it does not fall out unaided.
To access the upper bunk, start the climb by grabbing the grab handles
with both hands. Place the right foot on the bunk bottom to the right of
the cabinet and the left foot on the upper step. Put both feet on the
upper step and move the right hand to the upper bunk for support.
Swing the upper body into the bunk and sit down.
The grab handle for upper bunk access is located on the cabinet.
208
vn-vhd.bk Page 209 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Ladder in Down Position
2. Retainer
3. Grab Handle (on Optional
Fixed Bunk, Grab Handle is
Not Available)
4. Ladder (Stored)
5. Cabinet Grab Handle
6. Ladder Security Positioning
209
vn-vhd.bk Page 210 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VN 780, VNL 730, VN 670 OFFICE
Do not sit at the table when the vehicle is moving.
It is intended for use only when the vehicle is
parked. Passengers should be in the passenger
seat wearing the safety belt or in the bunk with the
bunk restraint attached. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in severe personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
To raise table, remove the cushions from the bunk, place them to the
sides.
Line up the latch pegs with the holes in the back wall.
Push the table firmly into the holes. Make sure the latches are caught
properly by pulling out on the table. When the table is in place, put the
cushions in place to form a seat and backrest.
To lower the table, remove the cushions and pull the handle
underneath the tabletop to release the latches. Lower the table to its
resting position. Place the seat cushions toward the walls and then
position the backrest cushions as illustrated. Press down on the
cushions in the middle to form a mattress. See “VN 780 Bunk Storage”
on page 189.
210
vn-vhd.bk Page 211 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
211
vn-vhd.bk Page 212 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SLEEPER COMPARTMENT SINK
A built-in sink is available as optional equipment in some sleeper
models. It is located on the left side, in the cabinet behind the driver.
The sink is mounted in the drawer space. To pull out, grasp the drawer
lip and release the latch. Pull out until the faucet can be raised without
hitting the cabinet.
Never run the pump without water in the freshwater
tank. The pump may be damaged if run dry.
1. Increase Flow
212
2. Decrease Flow
vn-vhd.bk Page 213 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To operate the water pump, there is a combined valve and switch in the
knob (see arrow in illustration) on the base. Turn the knob slightly
toward you to start the pump; see arrow in illustration. Turn the knob
further to increase water flow. When the knob is turned fully back to
rest position, the pump will stop.
Make sure the pump is turned off before pushing the
drawer in. If the pump continues to deliver water,
overflowing water can flood the cab floor.
In the bottom of the sink there is a spring-loaded drain plug that is
sealed by pressing down and twisting clockwise. To release for letting
water drain off, turn counterclockwise and the spring will lift the plug
and open the drain.
Fresh Water Tank
Water is drawn from the fresh water tank (1) located beside the waste
water tank (2) in the left-hand side luggage compartment. Refill fresh
water tank with potable drinking water only. Tank volume is 9 gallons
(34 liters). On top of the tank is a hose (3) that serves as a filler and a
vent tube. In the bottom of the tank is a drain valve (4), with a hose
attached, for draining the tank to the outside.
213
vn-vhd.bk Page 214 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
It is not recommended to keep unused water in the tank for over
one month. Clean and refill as necessary.
USE POTABLE DRINKING WATER ONLY. Verify with
the supplier of any water prior to filling the fresh water
tank that it is potable to avoid contamination of the
tank. In the event that non-potable or contaminated
water enters the fresh water tank, it should be drained
and the tank should be cleaned out with a good
commercial cleaner/disinfectant. The tank should also
be tested for purity prior to being used for drinking. It
may be necessary to replace the tank if it cannot be
cleaned properly.
214
vn-vhd.bk Page 215 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Fresh water and waste water tanks must be drained if
the vehicle is not being used and the outside
temperature is below freezing. Also drain the hose
from the pump to the faucet. Failure to drain the
system may result in component damage due to water
forming ice.
To fill the fresh water tank, unscrew the fill hose from the elbow fitting
and remove the fill cap (5) from the tank. The fill hose is connected to a
hose with a garden hose-type fitting. Before turning the water on, turn
the valve handle (6) to close the valve (see lower illustration). When the
end of the fill hose is inserted in the water reservoir, open the valve
slowly to fill. The valve is fully open when the handle is parallel with the
hose.
215
vn-vhd.bk Page 216 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
When the tank is full, reinstall the fill hose on the elbow fitting. Do not
tighten more than finger tight. Make sure that the valve handle is fully
open (1) to allow venting. If the valve is left in any of the closed
positions (2), the pumped out water may generate an under-pressure
in the tank, interfering with the pump operation.
The valve positions are shown as viewed from inside
the cab.
216
vn-vhd.bk Page 217 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Waste Water Tank
When the water is drained from the sink, it is collected in a waste water
tank behind the fresh water tank. Waste water tank volume is 19 liters
(5 gallons). The tank is fastened to the floor with a strap that can be
easily opened for tank removal.
Before removing the waste water tank, loosen the strap around the
tank and unscrew the drain hose from the inlet cap. Carry the tank to
an approved dump station and empty by removing the inlet cap and
tilting the tank up to let the waste water drain.
Flush the tank with fresh water. Replace the inlet cap, strap the tank
into the cab and attach the drain hose.
217
vn-vhd.bk Page 218 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
NOTES
218
vn-vhd.bk Page 219 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRE-TRIP INSPECTION AND DAILY
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOOD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHASSIS FAIRING/STEPS OPEN AND LOCKED
POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAFETY BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS AIRBAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEATS, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NATIONAL STANDARD SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NATIONAL COMFORT SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOSTROM SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASSENGER SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMMOBILIZER FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL AWARENESS FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL ECONOMY DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . .
VOLVO ENHANCED STABILITY
TECHNOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
(OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEHICLE SPEED RETARDING DEVICES . . . . . . . . .
COLD WEATHER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIFTH WHEEL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORMANCE BONUS FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERS
(IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
236
242
246
254
280
288
289
290
292
294
297
298
301
302
308
312
329
331
331
333
347
354
383
389
393
219
vn-vhd.bk Page 220 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
PRE-TRIP INSPECTION AND DAILY MAINTENANCE
Before working on or inspecting a vehicle, set the
parking brakes, place the transmission in neutral
and block the wheels. Failure to do so can result in
unexpected vehicle movement and can cause
serious personal injury or death.
Safety is the most important and obvious reason for doing a pre-trip
inspection. Federal and state laws require inspection performed by the
driver. Federal and state inspectors also inspect commercial vehicles.
An unsafe vehicle can be placed “out of service” until the driver or
owner corrects the deficiency. Owners and operators should familiarize
themselves with sections 49 CFR 396.11 and 396.13 concerning
Federal requirements for vehicle inspection. Certain other laws may
also apply.
Section 49 CFR 396.13 states that all motor carrier drivers must
complete a written report at the end of each work day for each vehicle
operated, covering most of what is covered in the pre-trip list. The
report should list all defects or deficiencies discovered by the driver. A
pre-trip inspection prepares for the end-of-work report.
Starting on the next page are suggested guidelines to be used in
performing truck, tractor and trailer pre-trip inspections. Depending on
the application of the vehicle being used, these guidelines should be
modified to include other necessary inspection points. For example,
steps and grab handles should be checked daily on refuse trucks
because the operator is getting in and out of the cab more frequently.
If any component or system does not pass this inspection, it must be
corrected before operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment requires
adjustment, replacement, repair or lubrication, refer to the Service
Manuals or contact an authorized Volvo Truck dealer for the correct
procedures, specifications and intervals.
220
vn-vhd.bk Page 221 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Take your time going through the pre-trip inspection. Remember that a
careful pre-trip inspection saves time by eliminating unscheduled stops
for correcting a faulty item.
The following information has been provided by the American Trucking
Association as developed by the D.O.T. Office of Motor Carriers
(BMCS).
Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List
VN Shown VHD Similar
Inspect the vehicle in a circular manner.
221
vn-vhd.bk Page 222 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Approaching the Vehicle
앫
Check under the vehicle for oil, fuel, coolant leaks or other signs
of damage.
앫
Check body surfaces for signs of breaks or damage.
Preparation
앫
Open drain cocks on air tanks to let the tanks drain.
앫
Chock wheels on vehicle and, if hooked up, trailer.
앫
Close air tank drain cocks.
앫
Start the engine and let the air pressure build up to normal. Stop
engine.
앫
Switch on parking lights and hazard lights.
앫
Apply parking brakes.
앫
Pull the hood release lever, release the hood latches, raise hood.
Step 1: Left Side of the Cab
Left Front Wheel
앫
Check condition of wheel rim. Especially look for cracks, missing
lockrings, bent or broken studs, clamps or lugs.
앫
Check condition of tire: properly inflated, no serious cuts, bulges,
tread wear or any signs of misalignment; valve stem not touching
wheel, rim or brake drum; valve cap in place.
앫
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvious leaking on outside or
inside wheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.
Left Front Suspension
앫
Check condition of spring, spring hangers, shackles, U-bolts: no
cracks, breaks or shifting.
앫
Check shock absorber condition.
222
vn-vhd.bk Page 223 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Left Front Brake
앫
Condition of brake drum. With brakes released, look for a
noticeable gap between lining and drum. (This check cannot be
made if dust covers are in place.)
앫
Condition of brake air hose.
앫
Check brake chamber mounting bolts and bracket.
앫
Check slack adjuster and chamber pushrod travel.
Condition of Front Axle and Steering System, Left Side
앫
No loose, worn, bent, damaged or missing parts.
Under Hood, Left Side
앫
Check coolant hose condition.
앫
Check condition of fan drive belts.
앫
Check engine and surrounding areas for coolant, oil and fuel
leaks.
앫
Check wiring harnesses for signs of damage.
Step 2: Front of Cab Area
Condition of Windshield
앫
Check for damage and clean if dirty.
앫
Check windshield wiper arms for proper spring tension.
앫
Check wiper blades for any damage, “dead” rubber and
attachment to arm.
Lights and Reflectors
앫
Lower hood and inspect parking, clearance and identification
lights on hood and cab. They should be clean, operating and of
the proper color.
앫
Reflectors clean and proper color.
앫
Turn on headlights. High and low beams should be operating and
lenses clean. If equipped, check daytime running lights.
앫
Left and right front turn signal lights clean, operating and proper
color. Raise hood.
223
vn-vhd.bk Page 224 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Grille
앫
Check that charge air cooler and radiator or bugscreens are clean
and undamaged.
Step 3: Right Side of Cab Area
Right Front Wheel
앫
Check condition of wheel rim. Especially look for cracks, missing
lockrings, bent or broken studs, clamps or lugs.
앫
Check condition of tire: properly inflated, no serious cuts, bulges,
tread wear or any signs of misalignment; valve stem not touching
wheel, rim or brake drum; valve cap in place.
앫
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvious leaking on outside or
inside wheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.
Right Front Suspension
앫
Check condition of spring, spring hangers, shackles, U-bolts: no
cracks, breaks or shifting.
앫
Shock absorber condition.
Right Front Brake
앫
Condition of brake drum. With brakes released, look for a
noticeable gap between lining and drum. (This check cannot be
made if dust covers are in place.)
앫
Condition of brake air hose: check for any chafing.
앫
Check brake chamber mounting bolts and bracket.
앫
Check slack adjuster and chamber pushrod travel. With brakes
applied or released, look for conspicuously different positions of
the slack adjusters.
Condition of Front Axle and Steering System, Right Side
앫
224
No loose, worn, bent, damaged or missing parts.
vn-vhd.bk Page 225 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Under Hood, Right Side
앫
Check condition of coolant and heater hoses.
앫
Check condition of fan drive belts.
앫
Check engine and surrounding areas for coolant, oil and fuel
leaks.
앫
Check fuel separator sight glass and drain if necessary. Check for
leaks.
앫
Check wiring harnesses for signs of damage.
앫
Check air filter with brackets and hoses for loose connections or
damage. Check filter gauge, if mounted on the filter.
Step 4: Right Saddle Tank Area
Right Fuel Tank(s)
앫
Securely mounted and not damaged or leaking.
앫
Fuel lines secure and not leaking. Check that shut-off valves are
open.
앫
Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.
Condition of Visible Components
앫
Rear of engine: not leaking.
앫
Transmission: not leaking. If equipped with oil cooler, check
cooler, hoses and fittings for leaks.
앫
Check drive shaft.
앫
Exhaust system: secure, not leaking, not touching wires, fuel or
air tubing.
앫
Frame and cross members: no bends, cracks or breaks.
앫
Air tubing and electrical wiring: secured against snagging and
chafing.
225
vn-vhd.bk Page 226 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Step 5: Right Rear Vehicle Area
Dual Wheels, One or Two Axles
앫
Check condition of wheels and rims. Especially look for cracks,
missing lockrings, bent or broken spacers, studs, clamps or lugs.
앫
Check condition of tires: properly inflated, no serious cuts,
bulges, tread wear or any signs of misalignment; valve stems not
touching wheels, rims or brake drums; valve caps in place and no
objects stuck between the wheels.
앫
Check that both tires are of same type, for example, not mixed
radial and bias type and that their circumferences are matched.
앫
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvious leaking on outside or
inside wheel.
Suspension
앫
Check condition of springs (leaf or air), spring hangers, shackles
and U-bolts.
앫
Axle alignment.
Brakes
앫
Condition of brake drums. With brakes released, look for a
noticeable gap between lining and drum. (This check cannot be
made if dust covers are in place.)
앫
Condition of brake hoses: check for any chafing.
앫
Check brake chamber mounting bolts and brackets.
앫
Check slack adjusters and chamber push rod travel. With brakes
applied or released, look for conspicuously different positions of
the slack adjusters.
앫
Check spring brakes.
226
vn-vhd.bk Page 227 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Step 6: Rear of Vehicle Area
Frame Area
앫
Frame or cross members not bent, cracked or otherwise
damaged or missing.
앫
Check that air tubing and electrical lines are properly secured to
the frame with no damage or chafing.
Lights and Reflectors
앫
Tail lights, brake lights and turn signal lights: operating, clean and
proper color.
Step 7: Coupling System Area
Fifth Wheel
앫
Securely mounted to the frame.
앫
No missing or damaged parts.
앫
Check that trunnion and plate are properly lubricated.
Sliding Fifth Wheel
앫
Mechanism not worn, bent, damaged or parts missing.
앫
Properly lubricated.
앫
All locking pins present and locked in place.
앫
If air operated: no air leaks.
Air Tubing and Electric Lines Visible From This Point
앫
Should be secure from dangling.
앫
Both air lines and electric line should be free from damage, oil
and grease.
227
vn-vhd.bk Page 228 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Step 8: Left Saddle Tank and Left Rear Vehicle Wheels Area
Dual Wheels, One or Two Axles
앫
Check condition of wheels and rims. Especially look for cracks,
missing lockrings, bent or broken spacers, studs, clamps or lugs.
앫
Check condition of tires: properly inflated, no serious cuts,
bulges, tread wear or any signs of misalignment; valve stems not
touching wheels, rims or brake drums; valve caps in place and no
objects stuck between the wheels.
앫
Check that both tires are of same type, for example, not mixed
radial and bias type and that their circumferences are matched.
앫
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvious leaking on outside or
inside wheel.
Suspension
앫
Check condition of springs (leaf or air), spring hangers, shackles
and U-bolts, no cracks, breaks or shifting.
Brakes
앫
Condition of brake drums. With brakes released, look for a
noticeable gap between lining and drum. (This check cannot be
made if dust covers are in place.)
앫
Condition of brake hoses: check for any chafing.
앫
Check brake chamber mounting bolts and brackets.
앫
Check slack adjusters and chamber push rod travel. With brakes
applied or released, look for conspicuously different positions of
the slack adjusters.
앫
Check spring brakes.
Condition of Visible Components
앫
Transmission: not leaking.
앫
Drive shaft: looks OK.
앫
Exhaust system: secure, not leaking, not touching wires, fuel or
air tubing.
228
vn-vhd.bk Page 229 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
앫
Frame and cross members: no bends, cracks or breaks.
앫
Air tubing and electrical wiring: secured against snagging and
chafing.
Left Fuel Tank(s)
앫
Securely mounted and not damaged or leaking.
앫
Fuel lines secure and not leaking. Check that shut-off valves are
open.
앫
Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.
Battery Area
앫
Open the battery box. Battery box securely mounted to vehicle.
앫
Batteries secured against movement.
앫
Battery cases not broken or leaking. Battery cables free from
damage.
앫
Tops of batteries and terminals clean and free from foreign
material.
앫
If equipped, replace battery lid and make sure it is securely
fastened.
In the Cab
앫
Check steps and grab handles for looseness or breakage. Also,
clean them if there is any substance that makes them slippery,
which makes cab entry/exit hazardous.
앫
Start the engine. If equipped, check that exhaust rain cap opens
when accelerating engine.
앫
Check gauges and tell-tale light function. See the Instruments
and Controls section.
앫
Check function of low air warning.
앫
Check clutch function. If equipped, check for clutch brake
function.
앫
Check windshield wipers and washers and horns, including
back-up alarm, if equipped.
229
vn-vhd.bk Page 230 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
앫
Clean inside windshield, door windows and instruments. Clean
mirrors.
앫
Check temperature control and defroster. If equipped, check
mirror heater.
앫
Check condition of warning triangles, fire extinguisher and flares.
앫
Adjust the seat. Check mirror adjustment.
앫
Check safety belts for function and damage.
앫
Apply service brakes. After initial drop, pressure should hold
steady, or increase slightly, with engine at idle.
앫
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
앫
Check for loose items in the cab. Secure them if necessary.
Hooking Up To Trailer
Hook-Up Preparation
앫
Check kingpin and mounting plate on trailer, free from wear,
bends or damage.
앫
Chock trailer wheels.
Fifth Wheel or Trailer Hitch
앫
No visible space between fifth wheel and trailer.
앫
Locking jaws around the shank and not the head of kingpin.
앫
Release lever properly seated and safety latch/lock engaged.
앫
Check all connections to dolly or trailer hitch and safety chains
are secured.
앫
Check function of trailer air supply valve and trailer brakes.
230
vn-vhd.bk Page 231 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Sliding Fifth Wheel
앫
Check that fifth wheel is not so far forward that the tractor frame
will strike the landing gear during turns.
Refer to the trailer manufacturer's manual for specific
information on the trailer checks.
Step 9: Trailer Front Area
Air and Electrical Connections
앫
Glad hands properly mounted, free from damage and not leaking.
앫
Trailer cord receptacle properly mounted, free of damage; plug
properly seated and safety catch engaged to prevent accidental
disconnect.
앫
Air and electrical lines properly secured against tangling,
snagging and chafing with sufficient slack for turns.
Step 10: Right Side of Trailer Area
Landing Gear or Dolly Area
앫
Fully raised; no missing or damaged parts.
앫
Crank handle present and secured.
앫
If power operated, no air/hydraulic leaks.
Spare Wheel(s)
앫
Carrier or rack not damaged.
앫
Spare wheel securely mounted in rack.
앫
Tire and wheel condition adequate for a spare: proper size,
properly inflated.
231
vn-vhd.bk Page 232 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Lights and Reflectors
앫
Trailer side clearance lights: clean, operating and proper color.
앫
Reflectors clean and proper color.
Frame and Body
앫
Frame and crossmembers not bent, cracked, damaged or
missing.
앫
Proper placarding.
앫
Body parts not damaged or missing.
Step 11: Right Rear Trailer Wheel
Dual Wheels, One or Two Axles
앫
Check condition of wheels and rims. Especially look for cracks,
missing lockrings, bent or broken spacers, studs, clamps or lugs.
앫
Check condition of tires: properly inflated, no serious cuts,
bulges, tread wear or any signs of misalignment; valve stems not
touching wheels, rims or brake drums; valve caps in place and no
objects stuck between the wheels.
앫
Check that both tires are of same type, for example, not mixed
radial and bias type and that their circumferences are matched.
앫
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvious leaking on outside or
inside wheel.
Suspension
앫
Condition of springs (leaf or air), spring hangers, shackles and
U-bolts.
앫
Axle alignment.
앫
Condition of torque rod arms.
앫
If equipped with sliding axles, check position and alignment. Look
for damaged, worn or missing parts, all locks present, fully in
place and locked.
앫
Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut, crimped or otherwise
damaged. Secured against tangling, dragging and chafing.
232
vn-vhd.bk Page 233 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Brakes
앫
Condition of brake drums. With brakes released, look for a
noticeable gap between lining and drum. (This check cannot be
made if dust covers are in place.)
앫
Condition of brake hoses: check for any chafing.
앫
Check brake chamber mounting bolts and brackets.
앫
Check slack adjusters and chamber push rod travel. With brakes
applied or released, look for conspicuously different positions of
the slack adjusters.
앫
Check spring brakes.
Step 12: Rear of Trailer Area
Lights and Reflectors
앫
Rear clearance, identification and tail lights clean, operating and
proper color.
앫
Reflectors clean and proper color.
Cargo Securement
앫
Cargo properly blocked, braced, tied, chained, etc.
앫
Tailboard up and properly secured. End gates free from damage,
properly secured in stake pockets.
앫
Canvas or tarp (if required) properly latched down to prevent
water damage, tearing, billowing or blockage of either mirrors or
tail lights.
앫
Rear doors securely closed, latched or locked; required security
seals in place.
앫
Underside guard in place: not cracked, bent or broken.
233
vn-vhd.bk Page 234 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Step 13: Left Rear Trailer Wheels Area
Dual Wheels, One or Two Axles
앫
Check condition of wheels and rims. Especially look for cracks,
lockrings missing, bent or broken spacers, studs, clamps or lugs.
앫
Check condition of tires: properly inflated, no serious cuts,
bulges, tread wear or any signs of misalignment; valve stems not
touching wheels, rims or brake drums; valve caps in place and no
objects stuck between the wheels.
앫
Check that both tires are of same type, for example, not mixed
radial and bias type and that their circumferences are matched.
앫
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvious leaking on outside or
inside wheel.
Suspension
앫
Condition of springs (leaf or air), spring hangers, shackles and
U-bolts.
앫
Axle alignment.
앫
Condition of torque rod arms.
앫
If equipped with sliding axles, check position and alignment. Look
for damaged, worn or missing parts, all locks present, fully in
place and locked.
앫
Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut, crimped or otherwise
damaged. It should be secured against tangling, dragging and
chafing.
Brakes
앫
Condition of brake drums. With brakes released, look for a
noticeable gap between lining and drum. (This check can not be
made if dust covers are in place.)
앫
Condition of brake hoses: check for any chafing.
앫
Check brake chamber mounting bolts and brackets.
234
vn-vhd.bk Page 235 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
앫
Check slack adjusters and chamber push rod travel. With brakes
applied or released, look for conspicuously different positions of
the slack adjusters.
앫
Check spring brakes.
Step 14: Left Side of Trailer Area
Landing Gear or Dolly Area
앫
Fully raised; no missing or damaged parts.
앫
Crank handle present and secured.
앫
If power operated, no air/hydraulic leaks.
Spare Wheel(s)
앫
Spare wheel securely mounted in rack with no damage to rack.
앫
Tire and wheel condition adequate for a spare: proper size,
properly inflated.
Lights and Reflectors
앫
Trailer side clearance lights: clean, operating and proper color.
앫
Reflectors clean and proper color.
Frame and Body
앫
Frame and crossmembers not bent, cracked, damaged or
missing.
앫
Proper placarding.
앫
Body parts not damaged or missing.
Before Leaving the Parking Area
앫
Remove chocks from the wheels.
앫
Test trailer hook-up by slowly pulling while applying the trailer
brakes with the trailer brake hand control valve.
앫
Test the service brakes before leaving the parking area.
앫
Test parking brakes by stopping on a 20% grade and applying the
parking brakes. The parking brakes shall hold the combined
vehicle and trailer without moving.
235
vn-vhd.bk Page 236 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
HOOD OPERATION
Avoid tilting the hood under high or gusty wind
conditions. Failure to follow this recommendation
may result in the hood unexpectedly closing,
which can cause personal injury.
Make sure that no one is in the way of the hood
when opening or closing. The hood could injure a
person under the hood.
236
vn-vhd.bk Page 237 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Opening the Hood
The hood is locked down by two latches, one on each side of the back
end of the hood
The hood release handle is at the bottom of the steering column. Pull
the lever as shown in the illustration to open the hood. The hood is
raised about two inches off its resting position and remains there.
237
vn-vhd.bk Page 238 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Make sure the hood can be opened fully without hitting anything. There
are two methods for opening the hood.
1.
238
Stand in front of the hood with feet in line with the vehicle. Place
feet well apart and grasp the recessed handle in the front part of
the hood. Transfer the body weight by leaning away from the
hood. Lift the hood until it is past the balance point. Release the
hood and let it complete the opening movement unaided.
vn-vhd.bk Page 239 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
2.
Stand at the rear fender edge on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift
the hood from under the fender, push the hood forward, release
the hood and let it complete the opening movement unaided.
Two restraint cylinders will engage during the last part of the
opening. The cylinders will slow and dampen the hood down to its
resting position.
239
vn-vhd.bk Page 240 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Closing the Hood
To close the hood, stand with feet well apart, place hands along the
front edge of the hood. Bend the knees and let the leg muscles do the
work when lifting.
Raise the hood up to the halfway point. Carefully guide the hood down
with enough speed that the hood latches lock the hood in place when it
comes to its normal resting position.
240
vn-vhd.bk Page 241 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Hood Latch (Optional) VNM 200 Day Cab, Short Fairing
The VNM Day cab hood is opened by unlocking and releasing both
sides of the latch located underneath the left and right-hand side
panels. See illustration.
241
vn-vhd.bk Page 242 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
CHASSIS FAIRING/STEPS OPEN AND LOCKED
POSITIONS
Always check security of fairing and steps before
use. Ensure that the fairing is completely closed
and the handles are in the locked position to
prevent injury from slip and fall.
The chassis fairing on the VN vehicle folds up and down for battery and
air tank access.
Opening Fairing
DO NOT open fairing while the cab door is open. This
can result in paint damage on the fairing.
To open fairing: Rotate both handles to unlocked position, and pull
fairing open.
242
vn-vhd.bk Page 243 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
1. Unlocked Position
2. Locked Position
243
vn-vhd.bk Page 244 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Closing and Locking Fairing
Make sure the fairing/steps are locked into
position. Failure to lock fairing/steps could result
in personal injury due to slip and fall.
To close and lock the fairings: Use your fingers to pull the handles to
the unlocked position (1) as indicated in the illustration. Push with your
palms against the fairings (2). Once the fairing is closed, make sure
both handles are returned to the locked position.
Slot 4 must be completely engaged into bushing
3 before fairing is closed and can be locked.
244
vn-vhd.bk Page 245 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Securing the Fairing/Step
Make sure the handle is rotated to the locked position. Pull on the
fairing/step to ensure the fairing/step is locked into position. See
illustration.
245
vn-vhd.bk Page 246 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Always place heavy objects in the luggage
compartment. Sudden stops or sudden turns
could cause personal injury if heavy objects fall
from overhead storage shelves.
To gain access to the luggage compartments, there is a pull-ring
connected to the lock, located at the lower rear corner of the cab door
opening, on each side (not shown). Pull ring to unlock the door. The
lock has a safety latch that will hold the door in place, even if the door is
not fully locked. To open door, hold pull-ring out while pulling the door
out.
246
vn-vhd.bk Page 247 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The door swings out from the bottom on hinges mounted on the top. To
assist in opening and to hold the door open, there are two compressed
gas cylinders mounted on each door. The door will swing up by itself
when pulled out a short distance and then released. Manually switch
the luggage lamp ON. Switch lamp OFF before closing door.
Safety equipment and tow hooks are stored in the luggage
compartments. If equipped, the sleeper heater and air conditioning unit
are located in the passenger side luggage compartment.
247
vn-vhd.bk Page 248 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
CAB DOORS AND DOOR LOCK
To lessen the chance of being thrown from the
vehicle in case of an accident, always lock the
doors and wear the safety belt while driving.
Failure to do so can cause serious personal injury
or death if involved in an accident.
The cab doors can be unlocked and locked with the same key used for
the ignition lock. There is also a keyless remote entry available. Keys
can be made to fit only one vehicle or all the vehicles in a fleet of Volvo
vehicles. The key fits in the door lock either way. Insert the key and turn
it 1/4 turn counterclockwise to unlock or clockwise to lock the door.
1. Press once to unlock driver
side. Press twice to unlock
both doors.
248
2. Press once to lock doors.
vn-vhd.bk Page 249 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The vehicle is delivered with two identical keys. If more
keys are needed, order them through your authorized
Volvo Truck dealer.
The door locks are mechanically or electronically operated. The lock is
activated by either the key from the outside or the door lock handle
from the inside. With mechanical locks, only one door can be locked
and unlocked at a time. With electrical locks, both doors will be locked
and unlocked by operating either the key or the inner door lock handle
on either side.
No door can be locked while it is still open. The door
must be closed for the lock to work.
With manual locks, to lock either door from inside the cab, push the
door lock handle forward. The handle will stay in place, indicating the
door is locked. It can be unlocked without opening the door by moving
the door lock handle to the middle position.
Push the lever back to open the door. Push the lever forward to lock the
door.
249
vn-vhd.bk Page 250 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
With electronic locks, to lock both doors from inside the cab, push the
door lock handle forward on either door. The handle will stay in place,
indicating the door is locked. Either door can be unlocked without
opening the door by moving the door lock handle to the middle
position. Each door must be unlocked individually from inside the cab.
To unlock the doors using the key, insert the key in either door look.
Turn the key to the unlock position to unlock that door. To unlock both
doors, turn the key to the unlock position, turn the key to the lock
position and turn the key to the unlock position.
Unlocking Electronic Locks
The door has a position lock that enables the door to remain open in
two different positions. An indented bar is holding the door at
approximately 30° and in the fully open position at approximately 85°.
To close the door from the inside, place the hand in the handhold and
pull the door in.
250
vn-vhd.bk Page 251 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
To close the door from the outside, place the hand flat against the door
lock area and push the door shut.
DO NOT shut the door by pushing on the door panel.
Hard pushing may distort the metal in the door panel.
251
vn-vhd.bk Page 252 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Power Door Locks (Optional)
Press button 2 to lock both doors or unlock the passenger door. In the
event of a power failure the electrical lock system reverts back to a
mechanical functioning system.
Central Locking
The central locking is operated using a remote control. There is no
alarm in this unit. The central locking unit provides a means for the
driver to electronically control the vehicle's door locks, for increased
personal safety and driver comfort.
Unlock Doors Using Remote Control
To unlock the driver door, press the UNLOCK button. The side
indicators will flash.
To unlock the passenger door, press the UNLOCK button again. The
side indicators will flash.
Lock Doors Using Remote Control
Press the LOCK button. The side indicators will flash.
252
vn-vhd.bk Page 253 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Heated Rear View Mirrors (Optional)
Press button 1 once to start electric heating for 15 minutes. The
indicator light in the button flashes. The heating is on for 15 minutes.
Hold button 1 in for longer than 1 second to start electric heating.
The indicator light in the button comes on.
The heating remains on until the engine is switched off.
Heater will run at 100% capacity for the first 30 minutes, after which it
reduces to 75% capacity.
Power Rear View Mirrors (Optional)
1.
Choose the mirror which is to be adjusted by pressing buttons 3.
L for left mirror and R for right mirror.
The light in the button comes on.
2.
Adjust the mirror using lever 3.
The light in the button goes OFF after 10 minutes. If new adjustments
are to be made after this, the mirror must be selected again.
253
vn-vhd.bk Page 254 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Power Windows (Optional)
Open Window (Auto-Down)
1.
Depress the down position (2) on the button for 1 second.
2.
Release the button.
3.
The window opens.
The window stops when it is completely open, when the down position
(2) on the button is depressed again or when the up position (1) on the
button is depressed.
Make small adjustments with short pushes on the button.
Close Window
Depress the up position (1) on the button until the window is completely
closed.
SAFETY BELTS
General
Safety belts must be properly worn at all times by
the driver and all passengers while the vehicle is
in motion even if the vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS or air bag).
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury or death in the event of a collision.
Fasten the safety belt before starting to drive.
Trying to fasten the safety belt while the vehicle is
moving may lead to an accident, causing serious
personal injury or death.
254
vn-vhd.bk Page 255 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Safety belt assemblies installed in this vehicle meet FMVSS 209, “Type
1” and “Type 2” requirements. They are recommended for all persons
weighing over 25 kg (50 lb.).
255
vn-vhd.bk Page 256 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
A child restraint system should also be provided for each child
weighing 25 kg (50 lb.) or less. It should meet the requirements of
FMVSS 213, “Child Restraint System.” Carefully read and follow all
manufacturer's instructions on installation and use. Be certain the child
remains in the restraint system at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
Safety belts must be worn by the driver and all passengers at all times.
Before adjusting or fastening the safety belt, move the seat forward or
backward and adjust the seat height as necessary. Sit erect and adjust
the seat cushion and seat back for a comfortable driving position. In the
event of a collision, a correct driving position maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belt.
There are both Federal and State laws governing the use of safety
belts. As laws differ from state to state, make yourself familiar with the
current rules.
Tether straps are installed on all suspension-type seats. Tether straps
help secure the seat to the floor and are intended to restrain the seat
and safety belt in case of an accident or sudden stop.
The tethers are not adjustable and do not need any adjustment.
256
vn-vhd.bk Page 257 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Operating the Safety Belt
To fasten the safety belt, pull the belt out from the retractor and insert
the latch into the buckle. Verify proper lock of the latch by pulling on the
latch.
Adjust the slack by pulling on the top part of the belt until the lower
part, or the part that crosses the lap, is adjusted to fit “snug.” Release
the top part and let the retractor pull the belt in.
The lap portion of the safety belt should be worn low across the pelvic
region (hip bone) and adjusted snugly. Never adjust the lap belt across
the abdomen. A push button on the buckle is used to release the safety
belt latch by pushing in the button release on the buckle.
257
vn-vhd.bk Page 258 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The buckle portion of the safety belt system is different depending on
the seat option chosen. The National Standard and Comfort seat has a
separate buckle that is attached to a floor anchor by a seat strap. This
seat strap is not adjustable, and does not need to be adjusted.
Comfort Clip Operation
When provided, the comfort clip is located on the shoulder strap just
below the D-ring.
When adjusting the comfort clip, the following procedure must be
followed for proper adjustment:
1.
Pull out only enough webbing to allow slight pressure to the
shoulder and chest. Allow no more than a 25 mm (1 inch) slack
when measured between the chest and the belt.
2.
To activate the clip mechanism feature, lift the lever up to clamp
the webbing in place.
When the safety belt is not in use, the clip should be in
the open position to allow the seat belt to retract to its
proper position. Also make sure that the adjustment of
the comfort clip does not interfere with the operation of
the safety belt.
258
vn-vhd.bk Page 259 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Open Position
259
vn-vhd.bk Page 260 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Always adjust the clip so that there is a maximum of 25 mm (1 inch) of
slack between the belt and chest (about two fingers width). If a larger
slack is allowed, the effectiveness of the safety belt is decreased in the
event of a collision.
260
vn-vhd.bk Page 261 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Sleeper Safety Restraint
Always use the safety restraint when the vehicle is
in motion. Failure to do so not only may cause
severe injuries or death to the passenger in the
event of an accident, but also poses a danger of
injuries to other occupants of the vehicle.
Anytime the vehicle is in motion, a passenger
using the sleeper bunk should be strapped in
using the safety restraint. The top bunk should
always be used with the harness in place, whether
the vehicle is in motion or not. Falling from the
upper bunk can result in severe personal injury or
death.
The restraint netting can be used for securing loose articles. Any loose
articles that can shift in the cab during hard cornering or braking should
be kept restrained.
261
vn-vhd.bk Page 262 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Fasten the restraint by connecting the buckle with the latch. Make sure
the belts are not twisted. Test the latch connection by pulling on the
belt. If they come apart, reconnect and test again. If the connection
cannot be made, replace the belt before using the bunk for sleeping
during driving.
To loosen the restraint, press the red release button on the latch.
Restraints should be properly stored when not used. Having the
restraint laying loose in the cab can be a source for unintentional
snagging.
262
vn-vhd.bk Page 263 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
1. Release Button
263
vn-vhd.bk Page 264 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Safety Restraint VN 430, VN 630, VN 670 and VHD 430
The restraint has latches in one end and buckles in the other so it can
only be installed one way. Connect the restraint to the back wall and
the buckles on the floor. Connect the side tethers and adjust the straps
to form a “tent” over the bunk (VN 670 upper bunk does not have the
“tenting” feature).
264
vn-vhd.bk Page 265 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Upper Bunk
265
vn-vhd.bk Page 266 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Lower Bunk
266
vn-vhd.bk Page 267 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Safety Restraint VN 730
Connect the restraint to the back wall first. The wall connectors are
located on the back wall. Connect the lower part of the restraint to the
lower buckles. Connect the side tethers and adjust the straps to form a
“tent” over the bunk.
The restraints for top and bottom bunks are different.
Each belt can only be installed to the correct bunk.
53-Inch Lower Bunk
267
vn-vhd.bk Page 268 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
42-Inch Lower Bunk
268
vn-vhd.bk Page 269 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Upper Bunk
269
vn-vhd.bk Page 270 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Safety Restraint VN 780
Connect the restraint to the back wall first. The wall connectors are
located in the storage units. Connect the lower part of the restraint to
the lower buckles. Connect the side tethers and adjust the straps to
form a “tent” over the bunk.
The restraints for top and bottom bunks are different.
Each belt can only be installed to the correct bunk.
Lower Bunk
270
vn-vhd.bk Page 271 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Upper Bunk
271
vn-vhd.bk Page 272 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Inspection
Failure to properly inspect and maintain the safety
belts can cause serious personal injury or death.
It is critical that any time a vehicle has been
involved in an accident, the entire safety belt
system must be replaced in the vehicle (which
also includes the sleeper bunk restraints) if they
were in use at the time of the accident. Failure to
replace the safety belt system may result in
serious injury or death.
A damaged safety belt, whether visibly damaged
or not, could result in serious personal injury or
death in the event of an accident. The safety belt
systems should be replaced at least every five
years.
DO NOT bleach or re-dye the color webbing
because it may cause a severe loss of belt
strength. This loss of strength could allow the
safety belt to break under stress, thus resulting in
severe personal injury or death.
272
vn-vhd.bk Page 273 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Check the belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, anchorages, and
guide loops to ensure that they are working properly. Look for
loose/damaged parts (without disassembling) that could keep the
restraint system from working properly. If the safety belt, retractor and
hardware were in use during a collision, they must be replaced. The
restraint system anchorage fasteners must be replaced if necessary. If
there is any doubt about the restraint system's effectiveness, replace
the entire safety belt assembly.
The following maintenance guidelines detail how to inspect safety belts
and tethers for cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear of the webbing,
etc., and damage to the buckle, retractor, hardware or other factors
which indicate that safety belt system replacement is necessary.
Check the web wear at the buckle/latch area. The webbing must be
closely examined to determine if there are any cuts, fraying or extreme
wear in the webbing. Cuts, fraying or excessive wear would indicate the
need for replacement of the safety belt system.
273
vn-vhd.bk Page 274 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The D-loop web guide is an area where almost constant movement of
the safety belt webbing occurs because of the relative movement
between the seat and the cab. This constant movement forms an area
where wear will often occur. The webbing must be closely examined to
determine if there are any cuts, fraying or extreme wear in the webbing.
Cuts, fraying or excessive wear would indicate the need for
replacement of the safety belt system.
274
vn-vhd.bk Page 275 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Check to make sure that the D-loop web guide is rotating properly. If
the guide is not rotating properly, the webbing will pull at the wrong
angle through the guide, accelerating wear.
If equipped, check the comfort clip for cracks or possible damage.
Make sure that it works properly.
275
vn-vhd.bk Page 276 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Check the buckle by inserting the latch and verifying proper operation.
Determine if the latch plate is worn or deformed. Check the buckle and
latch casing for cracks or breakage.
276
vn-vhd.bk Page 277 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The retractor web storage device is mounted on the B-pillar, just behind
the door in the cab. The retractor is the heart of the safety belt system
and can be damaged if abused, even unintentionally. Check the
retractor web storage device operation to ensure that it is not locked
and that it spools out and retracts the webbing properly.
If tethers are being used to anchor the safety belts to the floor, make
sure that they are properly attached to the seat. Tethers must also be
inspected for web wear and proper tightness of mounting hardware.
277
vn-vhd.bk Page 278 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
National Standard Seat
278
vn-vhd.bk Page 279 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
All hardware for safety belt mounting points should be evaluated for
corrosion. All attachment points of the system should be checked for
tightness of mounting hardware.
Check the web in areas exposed to ultraviolet rays from the sun or
extreme dust or dirt. If the original color of the web in these areas is
extremely faded, the physical strength of this web may have
deteriorated. If this condition exists, replace the safety belt system.
Important Facts About Safety Belts in Heavy Trucks
The high mileage associated with heavy trucks, the continual relative
movement of the seat with the cab, the possible contact with the
vehicle seat or other parts of the cab structure, and the potential
exposure of this safety belt to severe environmental conditions make it
crucial to inspect the seat belt system regularly. It is recommended that
the system is inspected every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or more often
if the vehicle is exposed to severe environmental or vocational
conditions. Any safety belt system that shows cuts, fraying, extreme or
unusual wear, significant discolorations due to ultraviolet ray exposure,
dusty-dirty conditions, abrasion to the safety belt webbing or damage
to the buckle, latch plate, retractor, hardware or any other obvious
problem should be replaced immediately, regardless of the mileage.
Once replacement of the safety belt has been determined necessary,
be certain that it is replaced only with a Volvo original replacement
safety belt. See your authorized Volvo Truck dealer for replacement.
Your Volvo safety belt system has been developed and tested
specifically for heavy trucks. Replace it only with the exact same
design that the vehicle was equipped with.
If the inspection indicates that any other part of the safety belt system
requires replacement, the entire belt system must be replaced. An
installation guide is attached to every replacement system, entitled
“Three-Point Safety Belt Installation Guide.” There are separate safety
belt instruction guides for suspension and stationary seats. Use the
proper guide for your type of seat and follow the instructions very
closely. It is vitally important that all components are mounted back in
the same positions as the original components that were removed.
This will maintain the design integrity of the mounting points for the
safety belt assembly.
279
vn-vhd.bk Page 280 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
SRS AIRBAG
The SRS airbag is intended to supplement — not replace — the
standard safety belt. The airbag is not deployed when the truck is hit
from behind, from the side or if it rolls over. For best protection, sit in a
normal, upright position. Always wear the safety belt.
For added safety, the vehicle may be equipped with an airbag or SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System) as a supplement to the standard
three-point anchored safety belt. The SRS is designed to reduce the
risk of injury to the driver's face and upper part of the body. Together
with the safety belt, the airbag helps prevent the driver from being
thrown against the steering wheel, windshield or other hard surfaces in
the cab.
The Volvo SRS Airbag provides increased protection in frontal
collisions, where the vehicle collides with a fixed or heavy object with
enough force to activate the sensors which then activate the airbag.
Damage to the vehicle is not always proportional to whether the SRS
Airbag deploys or not.
The SRS Airbag is not designed to be activated with:
앫
Collision from the sides
앫
Collision from the rear
앫
Rolling over
앫
Head-on collisions at low speed or against soft objects such as
bushes, snow drifts, etc.
SRS System
Never attempt to drive with a deployed airbag.
With the bag hanging out of the hub of the steering
wheel, the truck may be more difficult to steer. In
addition, other safety systems may be damaged.
Continuous exposure to the smoke and dust
created during the deployment of the airbag can
cause irritation to the skin and eyes.
280
vn-vhd.bk Page 281 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The inflatable airbag is folded into the center of the steering wheel. It
inflates in the event of a serious collision above a certain level, where
the angle of impact, crash severity, speed and nature of the object
involved in the collision all play a part in whether or not the airbag is
activated.
The system consists of a gas generator surrounded by the inflatable
airbag. In the event of a sufficiently violent collision, a control unit
activates the gas generator ignitor and the airbag inflates. To cushion
the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. This also releases
some nontoxic smoke into the cab. The entire sequence, from inflation
to deflation of the airbag, takes a few tenths of a second.
The SRS system is continually monitored by the control unit. A control
unit is mounted on a bracket above the engine cover which detects
deceleration. The control unit also contains a standby power unit which
can supply the system with power for a short time, in case the normal
supply breaks.
281
vn-vhd.bk Page 282 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If the control unit detects a sufficiently violent deceleration (collision),
the system is activated. The gas generator triggers and fills the bag
with a nontoxic gas within a few hundredths of a second. During a
collision, after the bag is full, gas flows out through two holes in the
weave. These holes are large enough to let the airbag collapse slowly,
gently catching the driver.
In the event of a problem in the SRS system, an icon is shown in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster.
The vehicle should be taken to an authorized Volvo
Truck dealer immediately if the SRS icon comes on or
remains on while the vehicle is being driven.
282
vn-vhd.bk Page 283 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If a problem develops in the system, the CHECK tell-tale will come on
together with the SRS tell-tale.
Warning Labels
The label attached to the left-hand sunvisor shows the year and month
when an authorized Volvo Truck dealer should be contacted for a
specific inspection and for a possible replacement of the airbag. This is
done to guarantee the function of the airbag after the indicated date.
Replace the label when replacing the airbag module. Never attempt to
make any adjustments to SRS components yourself.
283
vn-vhd.bk Page 284 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Steering shafts and steering wheel should not be removed, adjusted or
replaced without following the proper work procedure. Failure to do so
can damage the SRS system, which can result in malfunction of the
SRS. A warning label is located on the upper steering shaft.
There is also a label on the inside of the windshield that indicates the
inclusion of an airbag to the vehicle safety features.
284
vn-vhd.bk Page 285 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
When equipped with an airbag, a label with the correct procedure for
protecting small children and protecting the driver is attached to the
left-hand, overhead storage lid or back of sunvisor.
Any queries concerning the SRS system should be directed to an
authorized Volvo Truck dealer. There is no maintenance required for
the SRS system until the date on the warning label located on the
left-hand sunvisor.
Never attempt to repair any part of the SRS
system. Any interference with the system may
cause it to malfunction and result in serious injury
or death.
Work on the system may only be carried out by an authorized Volvo
Truck dealer.
To allow the SRS system to work as designed:
앫
Never drive an SRS system equipped vehicle with the hands on
the steering wheel pad/airbag module.
앫
No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on,
attached to or installed near the SRS cover in the center of the
steering wheel.
285
vn-vhd.bk Page 286 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
General Information
When is the Airbag Deployed?
The airbag is only deployed during a head-on collision, where the
vehicle hits a fixed or heavy object with sufficient force. The SRS
system registers both the force of the collision and the internal forces
caused by the collision. The control unit determines if the collision is
sufficiently violent for the airbag to be deployed.
The SRS system is only activated once in a collision. If
the airbag has deployed, the following is
recommended:
286
앫
Have the vehicle towed to an authorized Volvo
Truck dealer. Even if the vehicle can be driven
after a collision, it is not recommended to drive
the truck with the airbag deployed.
앫
Have an authorized Volvo Truck dealer change the
components in the SRS system.
앫
Only use original Volvo parts when replacing the
SRS system components (airbag, safety belt,
etc.).
vn-vhd.bk Page 287 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
When is the Airbag not Deployed?
Not all frontal collisions activate the SRS system. In a collision with a
soft object (a snow drift or bush for example, or a hard or fixed object at
low speed), there is no need for the SRS system to be activated. The
airbag is usually not inflated in response to side-on collisions, impacts
from the rear or if the vehicle overturns. The extent of damage to the
vehicle is no measure of how well the SRS system works.
Can the Airbag be Deployed Accidentally?
The complete SRS system is constructed so that the airbag only
inflates in particular collision conditions. The SRS system has its own
diagnostic unit which continuously monitors the functioning of the
system.
Heart of the Volvo Safety System
The three-point anchored safety belt is the heart of the Volvo safety
system. The belt should be worn at all times. The SRS system is
intended as a supplement to the three-point anchored safety belt.
287
vn-vhd.bk Page 288 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
SEATS, GENERAL
Several seats can be used in the vehicles. If the seat installed in the
vehicle is not explained in this section, see your authorized Volvo
dealer.
Before adjusting or fastening the seat belt, move the seat forward or
rearward and adjust the seat height as necessary. Sit erect and adjust
the seat cushion and seat back to obtain a comfortable driving position.
All adjustments are to be made while the operator
is seated and the vehicle is stationary. DO NOT
adjust the seat position while driving the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning can result in loss of
vehicle control, which can result in serious
personal injury or death in the event of a vehicle
accident.
Driver Seats
Passenger Seats
앫
National Standard Seat
앫
National Standard Seat
앫
National Comfort Seat
앫
National Comfort Seat
앫
Bostrom Standard Seat
앫
National Toolbox Seat
앫
Bostrom Comfort Seat
앫
National Bench Seat (VHD
Only)
앫
Bostrom Standard Seat
앫
Bostrom Comfort Seat
앫
Bostrom Toolbox Seat
288
vn-vhd.bk Page 289 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
NATIONAL STANDARD SEAT
Seat Adjustments
National Standard Seat
1.
Backrest Tilt: By rotating the round handle, the backrest recline
angle can be adjusted within 12 degrees.
2.
Cushion Front Tilt and Length: Pulling the handle up and out
adjusts the tilt and length of the seat cushion. Support your body
weight with your feet while adjusting.
3.
Fore and Aft Movement: Press the lever sideways to unlock the
seat. Move seat fore or aft to a new position.
4.
Ride Height Adjustment: Push the upper part of the switch up to
increase ride height. Push the lower part of the switch to deflate
the airbag and lower the ride height.
5.
Lumbar Support Adjustment: Push the upper part of the switch to
inflate the support for a firmer support. Push the lower part of the
switch to deflate the support.
289
vn-vhd.bk Page 290 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
6.
Cushion Rear Tilt: Rotate the lever to get different height
positions. Support your body weight with your feet while adjusting.
7.
Chugger Snubber: Moving the handle down isolates the seat from
the fore and aft movement of the cab.
NATIONAL COMFORT SEAT
Some National Comfort seats are equipped with a BackCycler®
feature. Some National Comfort seats have a swivel mount.
Seat Adjustments
National Comfort Seat
290
vn-vhd.bk Page 291 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
1.
Lumbar Support Adjustment: Push the upper part of the switch to
inflate the lower part of the 3-chamber support. Push the lower
part to deflate it.
2.
Lumbar Support Adjustment: Push the upper part of the switch to
inflate the middle part of the 3-chamber support. Push the lower
part to deflate it.
3.
Lumbar Support Adjustment: Push the upper part of the switch to
inflate the upper part of the 3-chamber support. Push the lower
part to deflate it.
4.
Backrest Side Support: Push the upper part of the switch to inflate
the support. Push the lower part to deflate it.
5.
Seat Cushion Side Support: Push the upper part of the switch to
inflate the support. Push the lower part to deflate it.
6.
Front Seat Cushion Adjustment: Push the switch up or down to
choose height position.
7.
Armrest Angle Adjustment: Ratcheting armrest. Set to desired
angle.
291
vn-vhd.bk Page 292 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
BOSTROM SEATS
Bostrom Standard Seat
Bostrom Standard Seat
1.
2.
3.
4.
292
Seat Adjustment Fore and Aft
Isolator Lock
Cushion Tilt
Ride Height Adjustment
5. Lumbar Support Adjustment
6. Recliner Tilt
7. Armrest Angle Adjustment
vn-vhd.bk Page 293 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Bostrom Comfort Seat
Some Bostrom Comfort seats have a swivel mount.
Bostrom Comfort Seat
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seat Adjustment Fore and Aft
Isolator Lock
Dampening Adjustment
Cushion Tilt
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ride Height Adjustment
Lumbar Support Adjustment
Recliner Tilt
Armrest Angle Adjustment
293
vn-vhd.bk Page 294 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
PASSENGER SEATS
National Bench Seat
The bench passenger seat has the option for a two-man storage seat.
The base of the seat is a storage box that is accessed by lifting the seat
cushion up.
National Bench Seat
294
vn-vhd.bk Page 295 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
National Toolbox Seat
The toolbox passenger seat has an optional accessible or
non-accessible toolbox in the base of the seat. If the toolbox is an
option, the storage box is accessed by lifting the seat cushion up.
There is a release latch behind the seat.
National Toolbox Seat
295
vn-vhd.bk Page 296 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Bostrom Toolbox Seat
Bostrom Toolbox Seat
1. Seat Cushion Release Lever
No Passenger Seat (Optional)
Using a temporary passenger seating without the
benefit of proper seat mounting and safety belt
can, in the event of a loss of control of the vehicle,
cause serious personal injury or death.
In vehicles with no passenger seat installed, DO NOT let a passenger
ride on temporary seating. This is against the law and can be very
dangerous.
296
vn-vhd.bk Page 297 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
ENGINE OPERATION
General
Proper operation, driving techniques and maintenance are key factors
in obtaining the maximum life and economy from a modern
turbocharged diesel engine. This section has operational information
about the components that make up the engine.
When changing gears, avoid lugging to extend engine life. When the
engine is operating at full throttle and maximum governed speed
cannot be reached or maintained, the engine is lugging. When
approaching a hill requiring more power, it is necessary to downshift
the transmission as the vehicle goes into the grade. Accelerating to the
governed engine speed will give additional power at approximately the
same road speed. For shifting instructions, see the transmission
manufacturer's operator's manual.
Always start moving the load in a gear low enough so that the engine
can be accelerated to the governed speed. Then shift to the next gear
as the engine decelerates. For loaded vehicles, do not skip a gear or
lug the engine while getting up to cruising speed. For empty or light
loads, it is permissible to skip gears.
When operating on a level highway or at cruising speed, hold the
engine speed at approximately 1400 to 1600 rpm for large
displacement engines to achieve power and economical fuel
consumption.
The operator should understand the operating characteristics of the
engine the vehicle is equipped with. Modern diesel engines have
maximum torques at much lower engine speeds than in the past. As
such, these engines are designed to perform satisfactorily at a lower
speed. New transmissions with wide ratio steps between gears
demand the use of these engines.
297
vn-vhd.bk Page 298 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
This vehicle is equipped with an exhaust aftertreatment system which
virtually eliminates exhaust smoke. Exhaust vapor may be visible
during a cold start. If exhaust smoke is visible during engine operation,
this indicates a problem with the exhaust aftertreatment system. Take
the vehicle to an authorized Volvo Truck dealer immediately.
IMMOBILIZER FEATURE
Volvo Engines Only
The Immobilizer Feature is used to prevent the engine from starting. If
your vehicle was not ordered with this feature, it may be available from
your dealer as an option using VCADS Pro.
To secure the vehicle, the driver needs to enter the correct 3-digit code
(PIN code) into the Driver Information Display (DID) via the stalk
switch.
298
vn-vhd.bk Page 299 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
When the vehicle is placed in the Immobilizer Mode during the previous
key-off, the driver is only able to start the vehicle after entering the
correct 3-digit code (PIN Code) into the DID using the stalk switch. The
driver will continue to be prompted for the PIN Code until the correct
3-digit code is entered.
If an incorrect password is entered or the driver
attempts to start the engine before the correct
password is entered, the INFO light will illuminate and
a message to check engine will appear. The ignition
key needs to be cycled OFF and ON to eliminate this
message.
299
vn-vhd.bk Page 300 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If the vehicle has not been placed in the Immobilizer Mode during the
previous key-off, the driver will be able to start the vehicle as normal.
After the password is entered (at shutdown) “Security Mode Active” is
displayed.
300
vn-vhd.bk Page 301 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
CONTROL AWARENESS FEATURE
VHD Vehicles and Volvo Engines Only
The Control Awareness Feature is a protective mechanism for the
Volvo engine and transmission. In addition, it provides a mechanical
safety to the existing Power Take-Off (PTO) functionality.
앫
Parameters are set in VCADS. If the vehicle exceeds the
maximum vehicle speed for the corresponding PTO mode, a
message appears on the DID screen as shown:
Do NOT exceed PTO maximum vehicle speed or
the PTO may be damaged.
301
vn-vhd.bk Page 302 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
FUEL ECONOMY DRIVING
General
The absolute fuel consumption (counted in liters per 100 kilometers or
miles per US gallon) is determined by a large number of circumstances
which can be related to one of the following main areas:
앫
Build specification and equipment
앫
Service and maintenance
앫
External environment
앫
Driving habits
Due to these factors, fuel consumption can vary considerably within
what is called “normal fuel consumption.” Fuel consumption can vary
from over 24 L/100 km (10 mpg) when driving empty on a nice and dry
summer road to 67 L/100 km (3.5 mpg) while driving with maximum
permitted GVW, with vehicle and trailer, on a hilly and slushy winter
road.
Build Specification and Equipment
Whenever a vehicle is used for transportation, its build specification,
equipment and gross vehicle weight have a decisive effect on both fuel
consumption and performance. The factors which have the greatest
influence on fuel consumption are primarily: driveline combination,
height of trailer or superstructure, use of air fairings, tire type, number
of wheels, gross vehicle weight, and accessories.
Driveline Combination
Engine, transmission and final drive must be selected in such a way
that the engine can operate within the economic speed range at normal
driving speed. This range is defined as where the engine makes the
best use of the energy content of the diesel fuel.
A poorly selected rear axle ratio, which results in the engine speed
being constantly above the optimum speed, will increase fuel
consumption.
302
vn-vhd.bk Page 303 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Tires
Heavy duty threaded tires increase rolling resistance considerably. For
long haul, choose a smoother, ribbed type tire. Choose a lugged type
tire only when the added traction in mud and snow is needed.
The number of wheels (axles) has a direct effect on the rolling
resistance and, thereby, the fuel consumption. For volume and/or low
weight transports, the use of a 4x2 instead of a 6x4 should be
considered.
If the tire pressure is too low, the rolling resistance increases and,
thereby, increases the fuel consumption. The overall economy is also
affected as tire wear increases considerably.
Gross Vehicle Weight
The gross vehicle weight of a vehicle combination has a large impact
on the rolling resistance.
Accessories
As a rule, accessories such as roof rack, advertising signs, bug
screens, exposed air horns, etc., have a negative effect on fuel
consumption.
Service and Maintenance
A modern heavy-duty vehicle requires regular and preventive
maintenance to ensure that all its components function as they should.
Use the recommended preventive maintenance (PM) program that
Volvo Trucks North America has developed for the vehicles. This
ensures optimal energy efficiency from all components that are
important to fuel consumption.
303
vn-vhd.bk Page 304 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Brakes
Dragging brakes increase fuel consumption. They should be checked
regularly. It is important that the release action of the air valves is fast
and that the moving parts of the wheel brakes are checked for good
adjustment and operation.
Axles
An axle out of alignment increases rolling resistance. Regularly check
the front wheel alignment and axles on both the tractor and
trailer/semi-trailer. If they are correct, there will be less rolling
resistance and, therefore, lower fuel consumption.
A good sign of an axle or wheel out of alignment is uneven tire wear.
Check the tires often.
Engine
Faulty or incorrectly adjusted engine components increase fuel
consumption. The list below gives some typical components that can
influence fuel consumption:
앫
Blocked (on the outside) charge air cooler/radiator package
앫
Faulty thermostat
앫
Blocked fuel filters
앫
Blocked air intake filter
앫
Faulty injectors
앫
Dirty turbocharger
앫
Air in fuel system
앫
Faulty fuel supply pump
앫
Faulty fuel relief valve
앫
Faulty fan thermostat/clutch
304
vn-vhd.bk Page 305 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
External Environment
Under unfavorable conditions, the external environment can have a
negative effect on fuel consumption. This can be broken down into two
main groups: weather and wind, and the nature of the roads. Rain,
snow, icy conditions and headwinds have a large negative impact on
fuel economy, as do hilly roads and uneven road surfaces.
Headwinds
Headwinds have a large negative impact on fuel consumption. With
tailwinds, fuel saving is only marginal.
Air Temperature
Low ambient temperature contributes to increased fuel consumption.
Rain, Snow and Road Surface
A wet road surface increases rolling resistance and, thereby, fuel
consumption. Slush will increase consumption even more. In certain
cases, the surface structure of the road can also have a negative effect
on fuel consumption.
Gradients
A hilly road with many bends demands a higher output from the engine.
The difference between flat, straight roads and hilly, winding roads can
amount to as much as a 50 percent increase in fuel consumption.
When choosing your route, avoid hills, rough roads and frequent stops.
305
vn-vhd.bk Page 306 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Driving Habits
The way in which a vehicle is being driven is the one factor which has
the greatest influence on fuel consumption. Correct driving saves fuel
and reduces vehicle wear. To achieve optimal running economy, the
driver should always remember to:
앫
Start the engine correctly (especially important in winter season).
앫
Maintain an even and correct speed.
앫
Keep the engine at its optimum speed range.
앫
Use the correct uphill and downhill driving technique.
Starting the Engine
Start the engine according to the instructions in the operator's manual
of the engine manufacturer (for a Volvo engine, see “STARTING THE
ENGINE” on page 336). A proper start, especially during the cold
season, saves fuel and reduces engine wear.
Sluggish lube oil in the engine makes cold starting more difficult.
Therefore, it is important to always use engine oil with the correct
viscosity. (For the sake of the overall fuel economy, it is also important
to have the right viscosity of transmission and rear axle oils.)
Avoid High Engine Speeds
High engine speeds mean high fuel consumption. “Jerky” driving also
increases fuel consumption when the vehicle is constantly accelerated
and slowed down. Avoid a higher consumption by steady, even driving.
Refer to each engine manufacturer's operator's manual for information
on the engine's optimum operating range.
Hill Driving Technique
Use the inertia of the vehicle to go over the crest of a hill under reduced
power. Use gravity to help with acceleration when going down the hill.
Build up speed before reaching the next uphill.
306
vn-vhd.bk Page 307 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Air Tanks
When draining the air tanks, do not look into the
area of the draining air. Dirt or sludge particles
may be in the air stream and could cause eye
injury.
All air tanks on the vehicle should be drained daily. Empty any moisture
from air tanks by pulling the drain valve wire or by opening the drain
cocks and allowing the air pressure to drain completely. Make sure the
drain cocks close properly after draining. During draining the tanks
should be checked for condensation fluid even if an automatic drain
valve is installed.
Trucks with Wabco air dryers: Periodically drain the purge tank to check
for contamination, water, oil, etc.
307
vn-vhd.bk Page 308 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Trucks with automated Meritor Transmission: Drain the transmission air
supply tank located on the right-hand rail daily to check for
contamination, water, oil, etc.
Charging Air to Another Vehicle
There are many methods which may be used to charge the air system
of another vehicle. Vehicles equipped with the standard two-valve
system (trailer supply and parking brake) must use the following
procedure when using the emergency trailer air line as an auxiliary air
source, other than to charge the trailer air reservoirs.
Before working on a vehicle, set the parking
brakes, place the transmission in neutral, and
block the wheels. Failure to do so can result in
unexpected vehicle movement and can cause
serious personal injury or death.
1.
Connect the emergency trailer air line to the auxiliary source.
2.
Start the engine.
CRUISE CONTROL
DO NOT use the cruise control in heavy traffic,
with ice/snow on the road or during other
unfavorable conditions. This may lead to a loss of
vehicle control, causing a vehicle crash, personal
injury or death.
308
vn-vhd.bk Page 309 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Engaging
The cruise control switches are located on the turn signal lever.
To engage and set desired speed:
1.
Set the cruise control switch to ON.
2.
When the desired vehicle speed has been reached, momentarily
press in the SET+ or SET- switch on the end of the lever.
3.
To increase speed, press the SET+ switch. A momentary press of
the switch (half second or less) will bump up vehicle speed in small
increments. Hold down the switch (more than a half second) to
ramp up vehicle speed. The vehicle speed will increase as long as
the SET+ switch is pressed (speed will not increase above the
maximum programmed speed). Release the switch when the
desired speed has been reached. The new set speed will be the
vehicle speed when the switch is released.
4.
To decrease speed, press the SET- switch. A momentary press of
the switch (half second or less) will bump down vehicle speed in
small increments. Hold down the switch (more than a half second)
to ramp down vehicle speed. The vehicle speed will decrease as
long as the SET- switch is pressed (speed will not decrease below
the minimum programmed speed). Release the switch when the
desired speed has been reached. The new set speed will be the
vehicle speed when the switch is released.
309
vn-vhd.bk Page 310 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below approximately 30 km/h (18 mph).
Disengaging
The cruise control is disengaged if the brake is depressed, or if the
cruise control switch is set to OFF. If the ignition key is turned back to
the accessories position (I), the cruise control system will automatically
be disengaged.
If configured, the cruise control will remain engaged if the clutch pedal
is depressed for short durations (to allow shifting while in cruise
control). However, if the clutch pedal is depressed for an extended
period (typically greater than 5 seconds), cruise control will be
disengaged.
Resuming Vehicle Speed
The previously selected cruise speed is retained in the memory. When
the cruise control switch is pushed to the RESUME position, the
vehicle resumes the previously set speed (provided vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 15 km/h [10 mph] when the switch is pressed
and the speed is not above the maximum programmed speed).
310
vn-vhd.bk Page 311 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Acceleration
Momentary acceleration (such as for passing another vehicle) does not
interrupt cruise control operation. After passing, release accelerator
and let the vehicle slow to cruise control speed. The previously set
speed will then be maintained without having to set the switch to
RESUME.
On vehicles equipped with Eaton VORAD
SmartCruise, cruise control is disengaged in the event
the SmartCruise system fails to operate. You must
stop the truck, turn the ignition off and on, and activate
the control twice in order for the cruise control to
operate.
Read the Eaton VORAD Collision Warning System
Driver Reference Manual before taking a vehicle
equipped with VORAD out on the road.
Volvo Engine Brake (I-VEB)
The Volvo Engine Brake (I-VEB) is standard on the Volvo 16F engine
and optional on the 13F engine. It has a higher braking effect than the
variable geometry turbo brake.
When the engine brake is in the A position and cruise control is
engaged, the engine brake automatically engages if vehicle speed
exceeds the set cruise control speed. The I-VEB will engage with
infinite control (within the limits of the engine brake) to maintain that
speed.
311
vn-vhd.bk Page 312 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
BRAKE OPERATION
Brake Safety Information
DO NOT inspect or adjust parts or components in
the brake system without setting the parking
brake, placing the transmission in neutral and
securely chocking the wheels. If the vehicle is not
secured to prevent uncontrolled vehicle
movement, it could roll and cause severe personal
injury or death.
DO NOT use replacement parts anywhere in the
brake system unless it conforms exactly to
original specifications. A nonconforming part in
your vehicle's brake system could cause a
malfunction, leading to loss of control of the
vehicle resulting in severe personal injury or
death.
DO NOT ride the brakes going down steep hills.
The brakes could overheat and lose their
effectiveness. Always choose a low gear before
going down the grade and reduce speed to help
control vehicle speed. Losing the brakes going
downhill can lead to an accident causing serious
personal injury or death.
312
vn-vhd.bk Page 313 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
DO NOT operate the vehicle when there is a
malfunction in the compressed air system. An air
brake system with leaks or other malfunctions
may prevent the brake system from operating
properly. The vehicle should not be operated until
the system is repaired and all brake circuits are
working properly. Failure to repair the system can
lead to loss of control of the vehicle resulting in
severe personal injury or death.
The brake system is a critical vehicle safety
system. For your safety and for those around you,
follow the recommended preventive maintenance
checks. If any problems occur, have them
investigated immediately by an authorized service
facility. Failure to properly maintain the brake
system can result in compromised brake
efficiency and may lead to loss of control of the
vehicle resulting in severe personal injury or
death.
DO NOT drive through deep water. The brake
system can be affected so the braking efficiency is
less or the brakes pull the vehicle to one side. This
could lead to an accident, personal injury or death.
313
vn-vhd.bk Page 314 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Automatic slack adjusters MUST NOT be manually
adjusted in an effort to correct excessive push rod
stroke, as this condition indicates that a problem
exists with the automatic adjuster, installation of
the automatic slack adjuster or problems related
to components of the foundation brakes. These
conditions will not be corrected by manually
adjusting the automatic slack adjusters.
Manual adjustment of the automatic slack
adjusters is a dangerous practice that could result
in serious consequences. This practice gives the
vehicle operator a false sense of security about
the effectiveness of the brakes, and the brakes will
likely soon be out of adjustment again.
General
All Volvo vehicles are designed to meet or exceed all applicable federal
brake standards and regulations. They use a dual circuit, compressed
air system. It consists of two independent brake systems that use a
single set of brake controls. Each circuit is supplied by its own
compressed air tank. Both air tanks receive compressed air from the
same supply tank (wet tank) and are charged with equal pressure. The
two circuits are interconnected for the parking brake system.
DO NOT release the parking brake or attempt to
move the vehicle until brake air pressure in both
circuits is at least 690 kPa (100 psi). Failure to
follow this procedure may lead to uncontrolled
vehicle movement and cause severe personal
injury or death.
314
vn-vhd.bk Page 315 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Never release or drive a truck that has a brake
discrepancy — no matter how minor — until it has
been repaired or corrected. Failure to repair brake
discrepancies can result in compromised brake
efficiency and may lead to loss of control of the
vehicle resulting in severe personal injury or
death.
Air pressures in the two circuits are monitored by two pressure gauges
on the right side of the instrument cluster. The primary (rear) brake
circuit gauge is marked with an “R” within a symbol and the secondary
(front) brake circuit gauge is marked with an “F” within a symbol. The
two pointers should register equal or nearly equal pressure. By
observing the gauge pointers, the operator is forewarned in the event
of a pressure drop in either or both of the circuits.
315
vn-vhd.bk Page 316 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Gauge 1 and Gauge 2
1. Gauge 1
2. Gauge 2
Before operating the vehicle, check the air gauges which indicate air
pressure. They should not register less than 420 kPa (65 psi).
316
vn-vhd.bk Page 317 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Both circuits are piped into a dual brake valve, which simultaneously
applies front and rear axle service brakes during each brake
application. In the event of a failure in either one of the circuits, the
other circuit becomes the emergency circuit for applying the brakes.
1. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2. Windshield Washer Fluid Fill
3. Brake Valve
The Master Warning Tell-Tale and buzzer alerts of a
dangerous situation. Air pressure is low and the
remaining air volume may not be enough for
repeated braking. Failure to heed this warning can
result in loss of braking control, vehicle accident
and injury or death.
317
vn-vhd.bk Page 318 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Master Warning Tell-Tale
An important feature of the brake system is that an automatic spring
brake application does not take place as a result of an air loss in only
one of the two circuits. In this case, brake control remains in the foot
brake valve. In each air pressure gauge, there is a warning light
connected to a low pressure switch that comes on if air pressure goes
below 420 kPa (60 psi). At the same time, the buzzer will sound and
the main warning tell-tale will come on. This pressure drop warns the
operator to make a manual emergency stop before an automatic
emergency stop takes place.
Brake System Controls
The air compressor, governor, pressure regulator valve and reservoirs
are control devices. Their function is to build up, maintain and control
air pressure in the reservoirs. This is so that pressure is held constant
between the minimum and maximum range established for air brake
operation.
The brake valve, quick release valve, brake chambers and slack
adjusters are application devices. They distribute the air pressure and
convert its energy into the mechanical force necessary to apply or
release the brakes.
318
vn-vhd.bk Page 319 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Foot Brake Valve
The foot brake valve is directly connected to the brake pedal. The valve
gives a progressive output against the pedal travel. This allows better
control of the pressure in the first half of the pedal travel. In the last half
of the pedal travel, the pressure output increase is faster.
The foot brake valve applies the service brakes, incorporating both the
primary and secondary air systems. The primary system controls the
rear brakes and the secondary system controls the front brakes. The
foot brake valve receives air from the compressed air tanks. Air
pressure is then delivered to the wheel brake chambers as required by
the amount of pressure exerted on the foot brake pedal. The brake
chamber force then applies the wheel brakes.
From the operator's viewpoint, operating the foot brake valve of a
vehicle equipped with air brakes differs very little from the operation of
a conventionally braked vehicle. Because the operation of the brake
pedal requires scarcely more effort than depressing the average
throttle pedal, air brakes are naturally much easier to control. If the
driver gives full attention to the following suggestions, a little
experience will make him/her thoroughly familiar with the air-controlled
braking of this vehicle.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in
loss of vehicle control and serious personal injury
or death.
319
vn-vhd.bk Page 320 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
1.
The best possible stop will be made when the first brake
application is as firm as the speed and road condition permit.
Then, ease off as the speed is reduced. Never apply the brakes
lightly at first and increase the pressure as the speed diminishes.
2.
DO NOT fan the brake pedal. Fanning gives poor brake
performance and wastes air.
3.
The air brake is designed so that when the brake pedal is fully
depressed, an emergency application results. This application
should be made only in an emergency situation.
4.
In making a stop or a slow-down, allow the transmission to remain
in gear with the throttle closed, disengaging the clutch only when
engine idling speed is reached.
5.
When parking the vehicle, place the transmission in neutral and
set the parking brake before shutting down the engine.
6.
When descending a long grade, do not use the service brakes too
long or too often. The brakes may overheat and lose their
effectiveness.
7.
Before descending a steep grade, the transmission should be
shifted into a lower gear and the vehicle speed reduced. Other
speed retarding devices should also be used if available (engine
brakes, retarders or trailer hand control valves).
320
vn-vhd.bk Page 321 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Parking Brake/Trailer Supply Valves
Trucks/Tractors may have two air control valves on the instrument
panel:
앫
Trailer Supply (red octagonal knob)
앫
System Park (yellow diamond knob)
The System Park valve knob (yellow) should be pushed in first, after
sufficient air pressure is built up (apply foot brake to prevent vehicle
from rolling). The Trailer Air Supply valve knob may then be pushed in.
The Trailer Air Supply valve knob and System Park valve knob will
automatically pop out if the system pressure (both front and rear
circuits) drops to 170 to 240 kPa (25 to 35 psi). The tractor protection
valve will then close, the tractor spring brakes will apply and the trailer
emergency system will be activated.
321
vn-vhd.bk Page 322 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
On vehicles equipped with the standard two valve system, the
operation of one valve together with the other permits the operator to
select the desired functions described below:
Red Valve (Trailer
Air Supply)
Yellow Valve
(System Park)
Function (Mode)
Out
Out
System Park
In
Out
Trailer Charge
In
In
Normal Running
Out
In
Bobtail
Parking Brake Release
VN and VHD models have engines equipped with engine electronic
control units (EECU). These have two features that may impact the
brake system. One is the anti-stall device in the EECU which senses
torque demand and automatically controls the engine to compensate
and maintain speed. On tractors equipped with parking brakes on only
one axle, the anti-stall device keeps the engine from stalling, allowing
the driver to pull away with the brakes dragging. This may result in
overheated brakes and damaged wheel hubs.
Continual dragging of the brakes will cause brakes
to overheat. This may lead to wheel end fire. To
avoid overheating, make sure both parking brake
knobs are pushed in before driving off.
If the yellow knob is pulled out and the red knob is pushed in, a
condition is created where the trailer parking brakes are not applied
and only the single drive axle brakes are applied. In this condition, the
vehicle can be driven away. Therefore, it is very important that the
driver make sure the yellow AND red knobs are pushed in all the way
before driving the vehicle.
322
vn-vhd.bk Page 323 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
There is also an engine shut-down device in the EECU that shuts down
the engine after a pre-programmed time in order to save fuel. This is
activated when the yellow parking brake knob is pulled out. Therefore,
some drivers park and release the parking brakes using only the red
knob to keep the engine running. It is then easily overlooked that in a
vehicle parked with both the yellow and red knobs activated, only the
red knob is pushed in by habit.
Incorrect Parking or Driving Position
323
vn-vhd.bk Page 324 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Spring Brake for Parking
Never leave the vehicle without being certain the
parking brakes are set or that other precautions
are taken to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury or death.
Before working on or inspecting a vehicle, set the
parking brakes, place the transmission in neutral
and block the wheels. Failure to do so can result in
unexpected vehicle movement and can cause
serious personal injury or death.
The parking brake mechanism uses spring pressure as a separate
power medium to apply the service brakes on the driving axles. The
parking brake is released by the same compressed air source used to
apply the service brakes. Since this brake is released by air pressure,
the system must be charged to at least 420 kPa (60 psi) before the
parking brake may be released.
324
vn-vhd.bk Page 325 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The parking brake spring tension is sufficient to hold a fully loaded
vehicle on maximum grades permitted on modern highways, provided
the brake drums and linings are in good condition and the brakes are
properly adjusted.
DO NOT use the spring parking brakes if the service
brakes are hot, such as after descending a steep
grade. Also, do not use the spring parking brakes
during freezing temperatures if the wheel brakes are
wet. To do so could damage the brakes, if hot, or may
cause them to freeze during cold weather.
If the brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and lightly apply the
brakes to heat and dry them. Allow hot brakes to cool before using the
parking spring brakes.
325
vn-vhd.bk Page 326 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
There are several ways to determine if the parking brakes have been
set. By pulling out the yellow knob:
앫
An audible rush of air will be heard when the parking brake knob
is pulled. The air exhausts from the park brake valve itself and
from the spring brake chambers on the rear axle(s).
앫
A black ring around the base of the yellow control knob will be
seen.
앫
The engine will stall if an attempt is made to set the vehicle in
motion.
앫
There will be a fluctuation in the air pressure gauge needles.
앫
The knob cannot be pulled out any further.
DO NOT attempt in any way to disassemble or
tamper with the spring brake chamber. The force
stored in the spring, if suddenly released, can
cause serious personal injury or death.
DO NOT apply the parking brake while the vehicle
is moving. The rear wheels may lock up causing
loss of vehicle control leading to an accident,
personal injury or death.
326
vn-vhd.bk Page 327 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Trailer Brake Hand Control
The trailer hand brake control is not a parking
brake valve and must not be used as one. This
brake is not designed to hold the vehicle
stationary. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in the unintentional movement of the vehicle
and may cause personal injury or death.
DO NOT use the trailer brake hand control as a
parking brake. The brakes could release and the
vehicle could roll, causing a vehicle accident,
personal injury or death.
The hand control valve for the trailer brakes engages the trailer brakes
independently from the vehicle brakes. The valve can be fully or
partially engaged but in any partial position it will be overridden by a full
application of the foot brake valve.
To supply air to the trailer brakes to slow the trailer down, pull the valve
handle down. The farther the handle is pulled down, the more air
pressure is applied to the trailer brakes. Releasing the self-returning
handle releases the trailer brakes.
327
vn-vhd.bk Page 328 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The “121” Brake Standard
This manual refers occasionally to “121” brakes. Although some
operators believe “121” only applies to vehicles equipped with anti-lock
devices, the “121” standard applies to all vehicles that are capable of
on-highway operation.
The “121” is a Federal requirement also covering alterations or
changes to parts or systems related to the “121” standard once the
vehicle has been placed in service. The owner and operator should be
aware that it is a violation for any repair facility to make any part or
component inoperative when it is required for “121” compliance.
328
vn-vhd.bk Page 329 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
The vehicle has a standard brake system, equipped with an electronic
speed monitoring and control system, Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).
ABS monitors wheel speed continuously but is not involved in
controlling the wheel speed unless there is an emergency. In normal
braking applications, the standard air brake system is in effect.
For proper ABS operation, DO NOT change tire
sizes. The size of the tires installed during
production are programmed into the electronic
control unit. Installing different sized tires could
result in a reduced brake force, leading to longer
stopping distances or accidents.
There is a sensor installed in each wheel on a monitored axle. The
sensors transmit information to the electronic control unit (ECU). The
ECU interprets the signals and calculates wheel speed, wheel
retarding and a vehicle reference speed. If the calculations indicate a
wheel lock-up situation, a signal is sent from the ECU to the
appropriate ABS modulator valve to reduce braking pressure. During
emergency braking, the modulator valve alternately reduces, increases
or maintains air pressure in the brake chamber to prevent wheel
lock-up.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully depress the foot
brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a safe stop. DO NOT PUMP the
brake pedal. With the brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control
all wheels to provide steering control and a reduced braking distance.
Although the ABS improves vehicle control during emergency braking
situations, the operator still has the responsibility to change driving
styles depending on the existing traffic, road and/or weather conditions.
For example, the ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is
speeding or following too closely on slippery surfaces.
329
vn-vhd.bk Page 330 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The ABS control unit contains a self-testing program that is engaged
each time the ignition is turned on. The operator can verify the testing
by listening for the ABS modulator valves actuating twice in series. To
increase the sound, hold down the foot brake pedal when the ignition is
turned on.
If any of the ABS tell-tales come on during driving or do not go out after
a short time after turning on the ignition, take the vehicle to an
authorized Volvo Truck dealer to repair the ABS or brake system. The
vehicle can still be driven with a problem in the ABS system. However,
ABS will not be working and the standard braking system will be in
effect.
ABS Malfunction Truck/Tractor
The instrument cluster also contains an ABS tell-tale lamp, which
indicates when there is a problem being reported by the Trailer ABS
system.
ABS Malfunction Trailer
330
vn-vhd.bk Page 331 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
VOLVO ENHANCED STABILITY TECHNOLOGY
Some vehicles are equipped with Volvo Enhanced Stability Technology
(VEST). VEST is an advanced stability control system designed to
provide both roll stability and under- and over-steer correction in a wide
variety of driving conditions. VEST continuously monitors a variety of
vehicle parameters and sensors (including steering angle sensor) to
determine whether the vehicle is reaching critical stability threshold. At
that point, VEST is designed to intervene by instantly de-throttling the
engine and applying individual tractor and trailer brakes as needed to
regain control.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (OPTIONAL)
DO NOT engage the differential locks while wheels are
spinning. Serious damage to the differential will occur.
See “Axles” on page 304 for more information.
The Traction Control System (TCS) uses the same wheel sensors as
the ABS to determine if one set of drive wheels is spinning faster than
the other wheel set. If the TCS determines that a wheel is spinning
(with vehicle speed below 40 km/h [25 mph]), it operates the brake
system to apply some brake force to stop the spinning wheel(s). This
puts the drive power over to the stationary wheel(s).
If vehicle speed is above 40 km/h (25 mph), a signal is sent to the
engine ECU, which reduces the engine speed to be consistent with
vehicle speed. This action helps reduce the amount of wheel spin and
gives the operator greater vehicle control.
331
vn-vhd.bk Page 332 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The TCS includes a switch to turn off the function. When the switch is
in the OFF position, the TCS operates normally to increase traction if
the drive wheels begin spinning. When the switch is pressed once, the
TCS tell-tale in the instrument cluster blinks continuously, indicating
that the TCS is in mud/snow mode.
Traction Control Switch
The mud/snow mode increases available traction on soft surfaces like
snow, slush or mud by slightly increasing the allowable wheel spin.
This prevents the wheels from getting bogged down. The TCS will
resume normal operation when the TCS switch is pressed again and
the TCS tell-tale goes out or when the ignition is turned off.
332
vn-vhd.bk Page 333 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
VEHICLE SPEED RETARDING DEVICES
When operating a tractor bobtail (without a trailer)
or on slippery roads, the engine brake switch must
be in the “OFF” position. Failure to follow this
instruction can result in loss of vehicle control and
serious personal injury or death.
The vehicle ABS will automatically turn off the vehicle
speed retarding device, IF one of the sensed rear
wheels is locking up as a result of vehicle speed
retarding device operation. The vehicle speed
retarding device will be turned back on automatically
when the wheels become unlocked. Consider
switching to a lower braking level if this occurs
frequently.
A vehicle speed retarding device is not intended to bring the vehicle to
a stop. A vehicle speed retarding device is only intended to retard the
vehicle speed under certain conditions.
It is normal for there to be a slight delay in the
application of a vehicle speed retarding device. When
using devices of this type, be sure to think ahead and
analyze conditions in order to use the device properly.
333
vn-vhd.bk Page 334 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Volvo Variable Geometry Turbo Brake
The variable geometry turbo brake is standard with the Volvo 11F and
13F engine. It uses software to close the variable geometry
turbocharger to create retardation.
For both variable geometry turbocharger and engine
brakes, use a “one gear” driving strategy when going
downhill to keep engine speed up for effective braking
(for example: uphill in 7th gear and downhill in 6th).
Transmission Retarder, VHD Only
DO NOT use the retarder on wet or slippery roads.
The retarder may cause vehicle to slide and cause
an accident which could result in injury or death.
Apply the retarder only when engine is at closed
throttle.
Observe transmission and engine temperatures.
Select the lowest possible transmission range in order
to maximize the cooling system capacity and
retarding. If overheating occurs, decrease the use of
the retarder and use service brakes instead. Check
the retarder overtemp light.
334
vn-vhd.bk Page 335 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The retarder is automatically disabled when the ABS
(anti-lock brake system) is active.
The Transmission Retarder is an option with Allison HD and MD
transmissions. It is activated by an on/off switch in the auxiliary panel
and is controlled by a stalk switch mounted in front of the wiper switch.
You can set 6 different levels with the stalk switch.
335
vn-vhd.bk Page 336 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Vehicle brake lights are always on when transmission
retarder is active.
For complete warnings and instructions, refer to the Allison
Transmission manual.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Start Procedure
For cold weather starting, see “COLD WEATHER
OPERATION” on page 347.
These starting and operating procedures should be followed for all
engines. For more detailed information about design and function on a
non-Volvo engine, read the operator's manual from the engine
manufacturer.
Before starting the engine, see “Instruments and
Controls” section for detailed information on how the
gauges and tell-tales work.
DO NOT use ether or other combustible starting
aids in any Volvo engine. Introduction of ether or
similar starting aids could cause a fire or
explosion resulting in severe property damage,
serious personal injury or death.
336
vn-vhd.bk Page 337 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Never operate the starter without first placing the
transmission in neutral or depressing the clutch
pedal. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the unintentional movement of the vehicle
resulting in property damage, personal injury or
death.
1.
Before starting the engine, perform the engine pre-trip inspection
and daily maintenance checks in “PRE-TRIP INSPECTION AND
DAILY MAINTENANCE” on page 220.
2.
Make sure the parking brakes are engaged.
337
vn-vhd.bk Page 338 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
3.
Place the transmission in neutral or depress the clutch pedal.
DO NOT crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at
a time; wait two minutes after each try to allow the
starter to cool. Failure to follow these instructions
could cause starter damage.
Some starters are equipped with starter protection. If
the engine is running, the starter temperature is too
high, the transmission is not in neutral or the clutch
pedal is not depressed, starter engagement is
inhibited. Also, when the key is turned to the start
position, there is a one second delay before the starter
is engaged.
4.
Turn on the ignition with the switch key. Some tell-tales will come
on in a routine check that shows the bulbs and systems are OK.
If any of the tell-tales stay lit, that function of the vehicle may not
be operable. DO NOT operate the vehicle until the problem is
repaired. For an explanation of the tell-tales, Refer to the Driver
Information Display Manual.
5.
Turn the key to the start position. Release key as soon as the
engine has started. For the Volvo engine, the preheater can be
engaged to help starting in cold temperatures.
If at start-up, or thereafter, the oil pressure gauge
indicates any drop in oil pressure, the engine must be
shut down immediately. Failure to stop the engine may
cause major engine damage.
338
vn-vhd.bk Page 339 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
6.
When the engine has started, it takes a while to send lubricating
oil to all bearings and shafts, and between pistons and liners. Wait
for the oil pressure gauge to settle at a normal level, then bring
engine speed up gradually. Increase speed as it warms up. Check
all gauges during warm-up.
7.
During warm-up, apply load gradually until the oil temperature
reaches 60°C (140°F). To move a loaded vehicle, the minimum
coolant temperature must be approximately 50°C (120°F).
Engine Break-In
Engines are run on dynamometers before being shipped from the
manufacturer. In most applications, the engine can be put to work
immediately, but the operator should be extra observant of the
operating conditions shown on the gauges during the initial 100 hours
or 5,000 km (3,000 miles).
A more frequent check of the engine compartment for fluid leaks, fluid
levels and fastener tightness is also recommended during the initial
period.
339
vn-vhd.bk Page 340 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Engine Overspeed
This vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine and should not be
operated in an area with a concentration of hydrocarbon vapors (for
example gasoline or diesel fuel fumes). Be especially cautious of
low-lying or closed-in areas. The vapors may be drawn into the engine
through the air intake and cause the engine to overspeed. Hot carbon
and other sparks may come from the exhaust system, and cause an
explosion and fire.
If the vehicle is in an area where hydrocarbon vapors may be present,
shut the engine off immediately if any abnormalities are experienced.
DO NOT leave it unattended.
The diesel engine will operate on any fuel which
enters the cylinder, whether it is from the injectors
or from the air intake system. Therefore, if any
solvent is used to flush out the air cleaner
element, the engine may overspeed during
start-up. Engine damage and severe injury and/or
death from burns or explosion can occur.
Idling
Diesel engines are electronically governed. The idle speed is
pre-programmed from the manufacturer. Low idle speed is adjustable
within certain limits (for most engines between 600 to 750 rpm).
The common belief that idling a diesel engine causes no engine
damage is wrong. Idling produces sulfuric acid, which breaks down the
oil and eats into bearings, rings, valve stems and engine surfaces.
340
vn-vhd.bk Page 341 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Avoid excessive idling. If the vehicle is parked for more
than 5 minutes, stop the engine. An engine can burn
from 3 to 5.5 liters (0.75 to 1.5 gallons) of fuel per hour
while idling. During long engine idling periods, the
engine coolant temperature may fall below the normal
operating range. Incomplete combustion of fuel during
the warm-up period can cause dilution of the oil in the
crankcase, formation of lacquer or gummy deposits on
the valves, pistons and rings, and rapid accumulation
of sludge in the engine.
Low Idle Adjustment
Before setting the idle, apply the parking brakes
and place the transmission in neutral. Failure to do
so can result in unexpected vehicle movement and
can cause serious personal injury or death.
If the engine coolant temperature is above 50°C (122°F), the vehicle is
stationary (engine running; accelerator released; parking brake on)
and the PTO not engaged, the engine low idle speed can be adjusted
with the use of the cruise control function.
341
vn-vhd.bk Page 342 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
1.
Set the cruise control switch to the ON position.
2.
Depress the foot brake pedal. Hold it down during the entire
procedure.
3.
Move the cruise control switch to the RESUME position and hold
it there for four seconds. Release the switch. The engine speed
will drop to the default low idle (Volvo engines), or a slight drop in
idle speed will occur (Cummins).
4.
The idle speed is adjusted up with the SET+ switch. Each time the
SET+ switch is pressed momentarily, idle speed will increase
approximately 10 rpm (the speed cannot be increased above the
maximum allowed by the engine manufacturer).
5.
The idle speed is adjusted down with the SET- switch. Each time
the SET- switch is pressed momentarily, the idle speed will
decrease approximately 10 rpm (the speed cannot be adjusted
below the low idle set by the engine manufacturer).
6.
When the desired engine idle speed is reached, push and hold the
SET and move the cruise control switch to the RESUME position
at the same time and hold them in position for four seconds.
Release the switches.
7.
Release the brake pedal to set the new idle speed. If an error was
made during the adjustment procedure, the default idle speed will
be maintained.
Idle Shutdown Timer
The idle shutdown timer can be programmed to shut the engine down
after a specific engine idling time. This programming cannot be
changed by the operator, but can be done using special tools. Contact
your authorized Volvo Truck dealer for details.
The permitted idle time can be set to the following time intervals:
Volvo — 1 to 40 minutes
Cummins — 1 to 100 minutes
342
vn-vhd.bk Page 343 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
When the idle shutdown feature is enabled, the engine will typically
shut down at the set time under the following conditions:
앫
Vehicle speed is 0.
앫
Engine is running at idle speed.
앫
Coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F).
앫
Parking brake is applied (Volvo engines only).
These are standard choices when the vehicle is delivered. For more
information about other customer adaptation choices, contact your
authorized Volvo Truck dealer.
Uphill Operation
For best performance, allow engine speed to reach the bottom of the
rated torque range before downshifting. Continue to downshift in this
manner until a gear is reached that will maintain the desired speed.
Continue to operate at the rated torque if the vehicle will make it to the
top without a downshift. Begin upshifting as the grade of the hill
decreases and the engine begins to accelerate above 1600 rpm.
Driving this way will give the best fuel economy and performance.
Allowing the engine to lug down to the end of
maximum torque range is permissible if the vehicle is
cresting the top of a hill. However, extended operation
at engine speeds below the maximum torque range
(usually 1000 to 1200 rpm) will raise exhaust
temperature and cylinder pressure. This can lead to
reduced engine life.
343
vn-vhd.bk Page 344 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Downhill Operation
DO NOT exceed engine manufacturer's recommended
maximum engine speed. Engine damage can occur. If
equipped with an engine or exhaust brake, DO NOT
exceed 2300 rpm.
On a downgrade, do not coast with the clutch pedal depressed or the
transmission in neutral. Select a gear that does not allow the engine
speed to exceed the engine manufacturer's maximum engine speed
recommendation. Use the engine or exhaust brake and/or the service
brakes to control the vehicle speed. A simple rule is to select the same
gear used to go up the grade.
High Altitude Operation
Engines lose power when operated at high altitude because the air is
too thin to allow burning as much fuel as at sea level. Closely monitor
the gauges during high altitude operation. The thinner ambient air
reduces the efficiency of the engine cooling system. Engine overheat
or cylinder damage could occur if the engine is operated at full load for
extended periods at high altitudes in hot weather. Downshift and
reduce vehicle speed to reduce engine load when driving on long
grades in these conditions. This will help keep engine air intake
manifold and coolant temperatures within safe limits.
344
vn-vhd.bk Page 345 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Stopping the Engine
Allow the engine to slow down and idle for 3 to 5 minutes before
shutting it off. This allows the turbo to slow down and the cooling
system to dissipate the engine heat. Switch the engine off by turning
the ignition key to the B, or OFF, position.
Shutting off an engine immediately after high speed or
full load operation can damage the turbo and cause
heat stress in the engine. Always let the engine idle for
3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off.
Engine Shut-Down System
Failure to take the necessary precautions when
the CHECK or STOP tell-tales are on, can
ultimately result in automatic engine shut-down
and the loss of power steering. Vehicle crash can
occur.
345
vn-vhd.bk Page 346 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The engine shut-down system will automatically derate or stop the
engine when one or more of the systems listed below reaches a critical
stage:
앫
High Coolant Temperature
앫
Low Oil Pressure
앫
Low Coolant Level
앫
High Crankcase Pressure
앫
High Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Level
Derate and shut-down functions may be applied differently, or added to,
depending on the engine manufacturer. See the engine operator's
manual for more information.
When the shut-down is activated, the tell-tales come on and the buzzer
is also activated. From that time it will take 30 seconds before the
engine shuts down. In this time period, find a safe place to pull off of
the road.
After the engine has been shut down by the system, the override will
allow a restart of the engine for 30 seconds. This is so the vehicle may
be pulled off the road, if necessary. The alarm will remain activated
until repairs have been made to correct the problem.
The operator should not continually override the system as this can
cause serious damage to the vehicle's engine.
346
vn-vhd.bk Page 347 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Volvo Engine Cold Start
These cold start instructions are for Volvo engines
only. For other engine makes, see the manufacturer's
handbook.
DO NOT use ether or other combustible starting
aids on any Volvo engine. Introduction of ether or
similar starting aids could cause a fire or
explosion resulting in severe property damage,
serious personal injury or death.
Volvo engines have a unique cold start feature.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine
cranks two to four turns without injecting fuel. This
provides cleaner combustion at start-up and promotes
longer engine life.
When starting a cold engine, the intake air should be warmed up by
using the preheater. Turn the ignition key to the drive position and push
the key in to request preheater engagement. The preheater does not
engage at coolant temperatures above 12°C (54°F). If the coolant
temperature is below 12°C (54°F), the preheater will engage and will
light the preheater tell-tale between 0 and 50 seconds, depending on
the engine coolant temperature.
347
vn-vhd.bk Page 348 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If necessary, once the engine has started, the preheater will reengage
(post heating) for the same length of time as the preheat time.
Engines Without Preheater
Engines not equipped with a preheater may, depending on coolant
temperature, take longer to start. If this should happen, DO NOT
release the ignition key until the engine has started (while still
observing the 30 second maximum cranking time).
Ether Start
DO NOT use ether or other combustible starting
aids on any Volvo engine. Introduction of ether or
similar starting aids could cause a fire or
explosion resulting in severe property damage,
serious personal injury or death.
348
vn-vhd.bk Page 349 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Cold Weather Operation
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the necessary
preparations are taken for cold weather operation, ordinary cold
weather will not cause difficulty in starting or loss of efficiency.
Cold weather operation does require changes in operating practices,
maintenance procedures, lubrication and fuel. Additions to the vehicle,
such as heated fuel filters, fuel tank heater, engine block heater,
winterfront, etc., can make winter operation easier. Contact your
authorized Volvo Truck dealer for the correct accessories and
information about installation.
If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained, increased engine
wear will result in higher maintenance cost. Accessories should be
designed to be easily disconnected when switching to driving in
warmer weather so they do not affect the operation of the engine.
349
vn-vhd.bk Page 350 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
For cold weather operation, follow these recommendations:
앫
When starting the engine in temperatures below –15°C (5°F), use
engine lubricants of lower viscosity. See the Operator's Manual
Vehicle Maintenance for additional information.
앫
When the temperature is below freezing, make sure the
concentration of antifreeze in the coolant is sufficient to prevent
freezing. Refer to the Operator's Manual Vehicle Maintenance for
additional information.
앫
During cold weather, pay more attention to the condition of the
batteries. Test them frequently to ensure sufficient power for
starting. A dead battery may freeze.
앫
Fuel cloud point is the temperature at which wax crystals become
visible, which is generally above the pour point of the fuel. To
keep the fuel filter elements from plugging with wax crystals, the
cloud point should be no higher than the lowest ambient
temperature at which the engine must start.
To prevent wear and possible damage to the engine when it is cold,
gradually bring it up to operating temperature before operating at high
engine speeds or full load. After starting and before moving the vehicle,
run the engine at 800 to 1000 rpm for 3 to 5 minutes. Operate at partial
engine load until the coolant temperature reaches 75°C (165°F).
350
vn-vhd.bk Page 351 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Engine Block Heater (Optional)
An electric engine block heater can be installed for keeping the coolant
hot when the vehicle is parked. The heater is mounted through the side
of the engine block with the heater coils in the coolant jacket. The
heater does not interfere with normal operation and can be
permanently installed.
The heater runs on 120 V and has an easily accessible plug, located
beside the driver side door. The plug will hook up to a normal extension
cable.
Location of the block heater depends on vehicle
model.
351
vn-vhd.bk Page 352 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Oil Pan Heater (Optional)
Oil pan heaters aid low temperature starting by improving oil flow to
critical parts in the engine. This helps prevent engine wear. They are
similar to block heaters and are wired into the same plug as the engine
coolant heater.
Fuel Heater Filter (Optional)
If running in very cold weather, a heated fuel filter should be added. A
number of different fuel heaters are available as options. They are
electrically heated and regulated by a thermostat or coolant heated.
They are typically built into the primary fuel filter housing.
352
vn-vhd.bk Page 353 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Fuel Tank Heater (Optional)
An in-tank fuel heater is also available. In-tank heaters use hot engine
coolant to warm the fuel. This prevents wax formation in the fuel during
cold season operation. These heaters are thermostatically controlled
and will automatically raise the fuel temperature to an optimum level.
Winterfront
Volvo Trucks North America does not recommend the use of
winterfronts, shutters or any other shield in front of the grille or
radiator package under normal circumstances.
Today's electronically controlled engines are designed to operate in
cold temperatures without a winterfront. These devices, if not used
properly, can cause higher exhaust temperatures, power loss,
excessive fan usage, failure of the charge-air-cooler and a reduction in
fuel economy.
Winterfronts are properly used in the wintertime during very cold
weather. In these cases, coolant and inlet manifold temperatures must
also be carefully monitored and controlled.
Failure to remove the winterfront when temperatures
go above severely cold temperatures could cause
severe damage to engine, charge-air-cooler and/or
loss of fuel economy.
If a winterfront is used, it must conform to these specifications:
앫
The grille coverage should be such that airflow through to the
charge-air-cooler is at a uniform rate over the entire area. This
means that a single, small opening in the winterfront is not
acceptable.
앫
Air passage must be distributed evenly across the grille and no
more than 85% can be covered.
353
vn-vhd.bk Page 354 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Please see your authorized Volvo Truck dealer for Volvo recommended
winterfronts.
If there is engine or related damage that can be traced
to an improperly used winterfront, the warranty is no
longer valid for those parts.
FIFTH WHEEL INSTRUCTIONS
Fifth Wheel General Information
Always have all fifth wheel maintenance and
repairs done by a qualified technician. An
incorrect repair can cause the trailer to separate
from the tractor causing an accident with serious
personal injury or death.
Things to think about with trailer hook-up:
앫
Check the load distribution between axles.
앫
Always chock the trailer wheels.
앫
Grease the plate unless it is a low lube or no lube top plate.
앫
Verify visually that coupling has occurred.
앫
Verify visually that plungers have locked on slider.
앫
Check for slack between the fifth wheel and the trailer kingpin.
Follow the instructions on the advisory labels attached to the various
manufacturers’ fifth wheels. An operator’s manual for each fifth wheel is
provided in the Owner’s package.
354
vn-vhd.bk Page 355 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If the fifth wheel is equipped with a sliding mounting, follow the
advisory labels attached to the component. Also, read the literature
provided by the manufacturer.
Always keep the fifth wheel plate well lubricated to
prevent binding between the tractor and trailer. A
binding fifth wheel could cause erratic steering
and loss of vehicle control that may result in
serious personal injury or death.
There are three operating positions for the fifth wheel locking
mechanism (ASF fifth wheel is shown as a typical fifth wheel):
Locked — This is the position that the fifth wheel will be in with a trailer
hooked up. In the locked position, the operating rod is retracted and the
safety latch will freely swing back and forth.
Lockset — This is the position the fifth wheel is in when uncoupling the
trailer. To achieve the lockset position, the operating rod is pulled out
with a slight upward motion. The operating rod shoulder will catch on
the plate casting. The safety latch is rotated toward the rear of the fifth
wheel.
355
vn-vhd.bk Page 356 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Open — This is the position the fifth wheel is in after the trailer is
uncoupled. The jaw is open and the operating rod is now dropped
down and can be freely moved around. The safety latch is rotated
toward the rear of the fifth wheel. This is the position the fifth wheel
must be in when being coupled to a trailer.
356
vn-vhd.bk Page 357 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Fifth Wheel Slider (Optional)
The fifth wheel comes standard with an air operational slider. To remain
within legal weight limits, this feature allows the driver to distribute the
load easily on the axles.
The air operated slider takes the work out of adjusting the tractor for
various trailer loads. The fifth wheel portion is easily adjusted, even
with a fully loaded trailer connected.
Movement between the adjustable saddle plate and the stationary
base plate rail can result in wear, causing longitudinal, latitudinal and
vertical slack. Field repairs can be made to reduce this slack for
additional service life.
357
vn-vhd.bk Page 358 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Unlocking the Fifth Wheel
Always check out the entire fifth wheel before attempting to couple to a
trailer (ASF fifth wheel is shown).
앫
If not lubricated properly, add grease to the top of the fifth wheel
plate.
앫
Make sure the mounting of the fifth wheel to the frame is tight and
in good condition.
앫
If using a sliding fifth wheel, make sure the slide locking plungers
are in a locked position.
The following instructions are for preparing the fifth wheel for coupling
to a trailer:
Rotate the safety latch toward the rear of the fifth wheel.
358
vn-vhd.bk Page 359 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Using a slight upward motion, pull the operating rod out until the
operating rod shoulder is outside the fifth wheel operating slot.
When the shoulder of the operating rod is outside of the operating slot,
raise the operating rod handle to its maximum upward position.
359
vn-vhd.bk Page 360 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Release the operating rod. The upper shoulder of the operating rod
should now be in contact with the plate casting above the operating
slot. The fifth wheel is now in the lockset position and a trailer can be
coupled.
Trailer Coupling Procedures
It is important that the operating procedures
contained in this manual are fully understood and
closely followed. Failure to properly couple the
tractor and trailer can result in their separation,
causing death and property damage.
Proper pick-up and coupling to a trailer is a
serious matter. A trailer that becomes
disconnected while in motion is extremely
dangerous to other traffic and may result in death
or severe personal injury. To ensure a positive
hook-up or coupling, the procedures should be
followed in every case.
This procedure covers vehicles with and without air suspension.
360
vn-vhd.bk Page 361 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Using the following procedures, inspect the equipment before coupling
to a trailer:
Make sure the fifth wheel is properly lubricated and the jaw is in the
open position.
If the jaw is not in the open position, use a pry bar
to rotate the jaw to the open position. The lock is
spring loaded. Keep hands away to avoid injury.
Use a pry bar to open the fifth wheel jaw, if necessary.
361
vn-vhd.bk Page 362 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Make sure the plate is tilted downward to the proper position at the
rear.
Make sure the mounting of the fifth wheel to the tractor frame is tight
and in good condition.
362
vn-vhd.bk Page 363 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If using a sliding fifth wheel, make sure the slide locking plungers are
fully engaged.
Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks (both on the front and rear of
the wheel) on both sides of the trailer.
Back up close to the trailer, centering the kingpin on the throat of the
fifth wheel, and STOP.
For tractors with air ride suspension, make sure the
suspension control switch is in the “RIDE” position
(switch pushed in at the top) and the air springs are
inflated.
363
vn-vhd.bk Page 364 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Connect the air brake lines and the electrical power cord. Make sure
that any slack in the lines is supported so that the brake lines do not
become entangled. Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the Trailer
Supply control on the dashboard.
364
vn-vhd.bk Page 365 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Attempting to couple with the trailer at an improper
height could result in a false or improper couple and
cause damage to the tractor, fifth wheel and trailer.
Check to see that the trailer is at the proper height for coupling. The
leading edge of the trailer plate should initially contact the fifth wheel
top plate surface about 200 mm (8 in.) behind the pivot point as the
tractor backs under the trailer. Raise or lower the trailer landing gear as
required to obtain this position.
Back under the trailer, keep the trailer kingpin centered in the throat of
the fifth wheel. After picking up the trailer — STOP — then continue
backing until the fifth wheel locks firmly on the kingpin. Stopping helps
prevent hitting the kingpin too hard.
To ensure a positive hook-up or coupling, these
procedures should be followed in every case. A
trailer that is not connected correctly may
disconnect from the tractor while in motion,
resulting in an accident, personal injury or death.
365
vn-vhd.bk Page 366 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
As an initial check, pull forward to test the completeness of the
coupling.
A direct visual check is required to ensure proper coupling. Several
types of improper couplings will pass the initial pull test. Sound is not
reliable. Do not take for granted that you are properly coupled. Get out
of the cab and look.
Failed Trailer Coupling
366
vn-vhd.bk Page 367 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Make sure the trailer kingpin is in the jaw slot and that the jaw is closed
behind the pin. The kingpin should not overhang the fifth wheel or be
caught in the grease groove.
To verify that the kingpin is actually in the fifth wheel slot and the jaw is
closed, the pin must be visually inspected from the rear. Use a
flashlight if necessary.
Make sure the trailer bed is resting on the top surface of the fifth wheel
plate, and that there is no visible gap between the fifth wheel and the
trailer bed plate.
367
vn-vhd.bk Page 368 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Make sure the operating rod is fully retracted, the safety latch is
positioned above the handle, and the latch swings freely.
If the fifth wheel is equipped with a manual secondary lock, check to
see that it is properly engaged.
If you cannot get a proper coupling, repeat this
procedure. DO NOT use any fifth wheel which fails to
operate properly.
368
vn-vhd.bk Page 369 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Check the kingpin to fifth wheel clearance by moving the tractor
backward and forward with the trailer brakes set. If the clearance
appears excessive (more than 3 mm [1/8 in.]), or if the jaw does not
lock, the fifth wheel should be inspected by a qualified technician
before proceeding.
Wind up the trailer landing gear (trailer support) to its fully retracted
position. Fold down or remove the crank handle and place it in the
crank handle holder.
Check the air brake lines and the trailer light cord connections.
Remove the wheel chocks from the trailer wheels.
369
vn-vhd.bk Page 370 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Trailer Uncoupling Procedures
For Tractors With Air Ride Suspension
Set the system park brake on the tractor.
Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the trailer air supply knob.
Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks (one on the front and one on
the rear of the wheel) on both sides of the trailer.
Wind down the landing gear until it touches the ground and then give it
a few extra turns in low gear. Do not raise the trailer off of the fifth
wheel. Fold down or remove the crank handle and place it in the crank
handle holder.
In poor ground conditions, it may be necessary to
provide a stable base for the landing gear.
370
vn-vhd.bk Page 371 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Disconnect the light cord and air brake lines. Use the dummy air
couplings to keep foreign material from entering the brake lines.
Unlock the fifth wheel.
If the operating rod is too difficult to pull, back the
tractor up slightly to relieve any kingpin load against
the fifth wheel jaw.
Release the tractor park brakes and pull the tractor away from the
kingpin about 300 mm (12 in.) and STOP. Do not allow the fifth wheel to
leave the underside of the trailer.
371
vn-vhd.bk Page 372 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Select the “UNCOUPLE” position (push down the latch and press in
the bottom part of the switch) on the suspension control switch to
deflate the air springs.
372
vn-vhd.bk Page 373 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Wait about 30 seconds for the air springs to deflate.
With the suspension lowered, pull clear of the trailer and immediately
select the “RIDE” position (press the top part of the switch in) on the
suspension control. This restores the suspension to operating height.
The vehicle must never be driven with the air springs
deflated. Damage to air suspension parts will occur if
springs are not inflated properly.
373
vn-vhd.bk Page 374 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
After the trailer is uncoupled, the fifth wheel will be in the open position.
The operating rod will drop and can be moved around freely.
374
vn-vhd.bk Page 375 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
For Tractors Without Air Ride Suspension
Set the system park brake on the tractor.
Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the trailer air supply knob.
Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks (both on the front and rear of
the wheel) on both sides of the trailer.
Wind down the landing gear until it touches the ground and then give it
a few extra turns in low gear. Do not raise the trailer off of the fifth
wheel. Fold down or remove the crank handle and place it in the crank
handle holder.
In poor ground conditions, it may be necessary to
provide a stable base for the landing gear.
375
vn-vhd.bk Page 376 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Disconnect the light cord and air brake lines. Use the dummy air
couplings to keep foreign material from entering the brake lines.
Unlock the fifth wheel.
If the operating rod is too difficult to pull, back the
tractor up slightly to relieve any kingpin load against
the fifth wheel jaw.
376
vn-vhd.bk Page 377 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Release the tractor park brakes and slowly drive the tractor out from
under the trailer. Let the trailer slide down the fifth wheel and pickup
ramps.
377
vn-vhd.bk Page 378 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
After the trailer is uncoupled, the fifth wheel will be in the open position.
The operating rod will drop and can be moved around freely.
378
vn-vhd.bk Page 379 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Operating the Fifth Wheel Slider
The trailer must be stopped and the trailer brakes
locked, or damage to the tractor and/or trailer may
result from uncontrolled sliding of the fifth wheel.
Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight line on level ground.
Lock the trailer brakes by pulling out the Trailer Supply knob.
Release the slide locking plungers by moving the switch to the
“UNLOCK” position (press down the latch and push in the bottom part
of the switch).
Check to see that both of the slide plungers have released. If the
plungers do not come out, lower the landing gear to relieve the
pressure on the plungers. Lowering the landing gear will also allow the
fifth wheel to slide easier.
379
vn-vhd.bk Page 380 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Slowly drive the tractor forward or backward to position the fifth wheel.
After sliding the fifth wheel to the desired position, engage the slide
locking plungers by moving the cab switch to the “LOCK” position
(press in the top part of the switch).
380
vn-vhd.bk Page 381 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
DO NOT operate the vehicle if the plungers are not
fully engaged and the trailer landing gear is not fully
retracted. Doing so may cause damage to the tractor,
trailer and landing gear.
Visually check to see that the slide plungers are fully engaged. It may
be necessary to leave the trailer brakes locked and to move the tractor
slightly to engage the slide plungers into the rail.
Wind up the trailer landing gear to its fully retracted position.
381
vn-vhd.bk Page 382 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Clutch
General
Before starting the engine, set the parking brakes
and place the transmission in neutral. Failure to do
so can result in unexpected vehicle movement and
can cause serious personal injury and death.
DO NOT allow the clutch to slip excessively. This would cause
excessive heat to be generated and the clutch will be damaged and
bring on premature failure. As soon as the vehicle is moving, remove
the foot from the pedal for complete clutch engagement. Once the
clutch is fully engaged, heat and wear does not affect it.
DO NOT shock load the drive line through rapid engagement of the
clutch. Extreme care should be taken when driving heavy loads up
hills. Always use the lowest gear when starting out under adverse
conditions.
When operating a vehicle equipped with a clutch brake, the clutch
pedal should not be depressed more than halfway to the floor while
shifting, except when the vehicle is at a stop. To re-enter the low gear
from neutral or reverse, or to enter reverse gear from neutral or low, the
clutch should be depressed all the way to engage the clutch brake.
This stops the rotation of the transmission input shaft and provides an
easy, quiet gear engagement.
382
vn-vhd.bk Page 383 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
PERFORMANCE BONUS FEATURE
Description
앫
The Performance Bonus Feature is a tool used to promote driver
efficiency.
앫
This feature rewards the driver with a higher Road Speed Limit
(RSL) only if the performance targets set by the fleet
management are achieved. Targets are set based upon fuel
economy, idle time or a combination of both, or by the Sweet Spot
Indicator.
앫
The reward of higher RSL increases driver productivity and
income. It also promotes increased driver and fuel efficiency.
To obtain more information about the Performance Bonus Feature,
contact your Volvo dealer.
The Performance Bonus Feature is programmable (by
your dealer) using VCADS Pro or VCADS Pro Elite.
Performance Bonus Status Reward
Driver reward is shown in the Driver Information Display screen (DID).
Once the ignition is turned ON, the Performance Bonus status appears
and remains on the screen for 15 seconds.
Only priority 1 messages will temporarily close the
rewards status menu. For additional information about
the DID, refer to the Driver Information Display
Manual.
383
vn-vhd.bk Page 384 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Rolling Buffer
The “rolling buffer” is set to measure distance driven. The buffer may
be set at a short or long distance. A short buffer results in a faster
reward, (or loss of reward) which provides driving fuel economy training
to the driver, permitting the driver easy memory of the input to the
buffer during this short period of time. A long buffer setting allows for
the daily activities to “smooth out”. In this case the reward is based on
weekly/monthly activity.
The DID will indicate the Performance Bonus status by showing the
actual status and target within the parenthesis.
384
vn-vhd.bk Page 385 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Performance Bonus Guide
Volvo Engines Only
The Performance Bonus Guide is an aid that provides comprehensive
feedback to the driver about the optimum engine operating range
during a trip. If adhered to, this results in improved fuel efficiency. Icons
in the Driver Information Display (DID) guide drivers to the most
efficient engine operating range for any given engine load and speed.
This is referred to as the engine's “Sweet Spot”.
The Performance Bonus Guide is inactive at low vehicle speeds. The
engine is designed to allow the driver to stay within the Sweet Spot
during most normal operating conditions. There may be situations
where it is necessary to operate the engine outside the Sweet Spot,
however, this will negatively affect fuel consumption.
385
vn-vhd.bk Page 386 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
386
vn-vhd.bk Page 387 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Driving Mode
The Sweet Spot Status icons are displayed at the bottom left of the DID
screen. The Sweet Spot symbol is displayed at the top of the screen
underneath Fuel Data. The Sweet Spot percentage page is displayed
in the Fuel Data menu. The DID shows the screen with Sweet Spot Trip
Data Percentage.
In the example shown, 50% means the engine has operated 50% of
the driven distance, since the last trip data reset, within the engine's
most efficient operating range.
387
vn-vhd.bk Page 388 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If Performance Bonus is enabled, and the Sweet Spot percentage
target is a chosen condition, the DID also displays the Sweet Spot
target percentage in parenthesis.
The Performance Bonus Guide is a standard feature for all Volvo
engines on vehicles equipped with the mid or high level instrument
cluster. Performance Bonus does not work with the basic instrument
cluster.
When Sweet Spot percentage is used as a chosen
condition in Performance Bonus, the target percentage
is programmable by Volvo.
Non-Driving Mode
If Performance Bonus is disabled, the Sweet Spot percentage data
can be reset by resetting the vehicle trip information.
If Performance Bonus is enabled, and the Sweet Spot percentage
target is chosen as a condition, the Sweet Spot data CANNOT be
reset.
Total Data menu displays the percentage of distance the vehicle has
spent in the Sweet Spot during the life of the vehicle.
For more information about this feature, contact your local Volvo Truck
dealer.
388
vn-vhd.bk Page 389 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
AXLES
Differential Locks
DO NOT drive on dry, paved surface with the
differential locks engaged. The vehicle will strive
to maintain a straight line. Taking a curve with the
differential locks engaged may cause an accident,
leading to serious personal injury or death.
Never operate the vehicle with the differentials locked
any longer than is necessary, as this places a great
strain on the axles and may cause rapid tire wear.
Under normal traction conditions, do not engage the differential locks.
If at all possible, do not use the differential locks while taking a curve.
With good traction and the differential locks engaged, the vehicle will
be understeered and therefore will tend to drive straight in a curve.
When using locks on good traction surface, drive cautiously and do not
exceed 40 km/h (25 mph). Disengage the locks as soon as possible.
When the differential locks are disengaged, the couplings may be
under tension. Disengage the locks by returning the switch to the OFF
position. Help with the disengagement by briefly letting up on the
accelerator to relieve the torque on the couplings.
The drive axle(s) may be equipped with differential locks. The single
drive axle will only have a wheel differential lock. With tandem drive
axles, there could be both wheel differential locks and an inter-axle
differential lock.
389
vn-vhd.bk Page 390 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The differential lock should be used on icy or slippery surfaces. As
soon as the slippery surface has been passed, the differential lock
should be disengaged.
Differential locks must not, under any circumstances, be engaged
when in a wheel-spin situation. Engage the locks ahead of the slippery
area. If already slipping, stop the wheels, engage the locks and then
continue. If the differential locks are engaged when the wheels are
spinning, the differential will be damaged and the rear axle drive unit
could possibly fail.
All efforts must be made to avoid spinning the wheels at high speeds
on slippery surfaces. This is true whether the differential locks are
engaged or not. Excessive wheel spin may result in failure of the
cluster gears and other components found within the rear axle
housing(s). If you are unable to obtain traction, engage the differential
locks as described below. If you are still unable to move the truck, seek
assistance from a qualified tow operator.
Engaging the differential locks must always be done as follows (see
“Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List” on page 221 for switch location):
1.
Depress the clutch pedal. Wait for the drive wheels to stop
spinning.
2.
Engage the differential lock.
3.
Engage a suitable gear.
4.
Carefully release the clutch pedal.
390
vn-vhd.bk Page 391 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Auxiliary Lift Axle VHD
Before raising or lowering any of the auxiliary
axles, be certain no one can be trapped by the axle
movement. Failure to do so can result in a person
being trapped between the wheel and the body, or
between the wheel and the ground, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Vehicles may be equipped with auxiliary lift axles. The lift mechanism
operates with air pressure. Press the top part of the switch in to raise
the axle and press the lower part of the switch in to lower the axle.
Pusher Axle
Tag Axle
391
vn-vhd.bk Page 392 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
DO NOT rely on gauges to determine axle pressure.
Weight must be verified on scales, and pressure in the
air springs should then be adjusted accordingly.
Regulators for adjusting the air spring pressure are located on the
outside of the cab, below the rear corner of the driver side door.
Regulators are operated by turning the knob counterclockwise for
lowering pressure, and clockwise for increasing pressure.
392
vn-vhd.bk Page 393 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Catalyzed Diesel Particulate Filters (DPF) (If Equipped)
The following exhaust Aftertreatment system
information applies to Volvo vehicles equipped with a
Volvo or Cummins engine and a catalyzed DPF.
This vehicle is equipped with a 2007 emission compliant engine and an
exhaust Aftertreatment system which includes a Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF). The DPF reduces soot and particulate emissions into the
atmosphere. Vehicles equipped with a DPF require the use of VDS-4
or EO-O Premium Plus specification high performance diesel engine
oil and Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel.
1. Vertical Back-of-Cab DPF
2. Cap DPF, which is a space
saving unit that is mounted
inside the frame.
393
vn-vhd.bk Page 394 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Exhaust gases and components can be at
extremely high temperatures during regeneration.
When parking the vehicle, keep away from people,
any flammable materials, vapors, or structures.
Serious personal injury may result.
The temperature of the exhaust system
components during the regeneration process can
exceed 350°C (662°F). The exhaust gas leaving,
can reach 600°C (1112°F). Various factors
(including ambient temperature and duration of
the regeneration process) determine when these
components will return to normal operating
temperature after regeneration has completed. Be
extremely careful around these hot components.
Contact with these components can result in
serious personal injury.
394
vn-vhd.bk Page 395 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Use of diesel fuel other than ULSD and engine oils
other than VDS-4 or EO-O Premium Plus, will
adversely affect performance, efficiency and durability
of the DPF system and the engine, to the point where
the engine may not run at all. Manufacturer’s
warranties can also be rendered void due to usage of
improper fuel. Unapproved fuel additives (including
engine oil) are NOT permitted. Blends of No. 1D and
No. 2D grades of ULSD are recommended and
allowable for cold weather operations.
The diesel particulate filter takes the place of the standard muffler.
Soot and other particulate matter are collected by a filter where it is
eventually oxidized using a regeneration process.
During the regeneration process, the temperature
of the exhaust gases will be elevated. DO NOT park
or stop for an extended period under low hanging
overhead flammable objects such as trees,
awnings, structures, etc., that could be damaged
by elevated exhaust temperatures. Further, if the
vehicle is being operated in an area where
flammable vapors exist, the regeneration process
must be interrupted. Failure to heed these
cautions may result in fire or explosion causing
serious personal injury or death.
There are two types of regeneration: at speed automatic and parked.
Automatic regeneration only occurs when the vehicle is moving at
uninterrupted highway speed. Parked regeneration is manually initiated
when the vehicle is stationary. This is the standard configuration. Other
configurations are available.
395
vn-vhd.bk Page 396 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Aftertreatment icons are displayed on the instrument cluster. There are
two Aftertreatment icons:
앫
DPF Regeneration required
앫
High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST)
The Aftertreatment icons are located in the lower left corner of the
instrument cluster.
396
vn-vhd.bk Page 397 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The Aftertreatment system is self-monitoring. When the diesel
particulate filter is becoming full and regeneration is needed, the DPF
Regeneration Required icon on the instrument cluster illuminates and
the message “REGEN In Process, Enter to Delay” is displayed.
Maintain uninterrupted highway speed for an automatic regeneration.
To delay the regeneration process, if necessary, press Enter on the
stalk switch. Initiate a parked regeneration at the next stop.
DPF Regeneration Required
397
vn-vhd.bk Page 398 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If the regeneration process is delayed, the message “REGEN
Cancelled” is displayed for a short time. The DPF Regeneration
Required icon will remain illuminated and the message “Parked
REGEN Required” is displayed. To return to the main menu, press
ESC on the stalk switch.
398
vn-vhd.bk Page 399 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If the regeneration process is not delayed, the regeneration process
starts, the DPF Regeneration Request icon turns off and the High
Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) icon may illuminate. The HEST
icon is shown only at low speeds and elevated exhaust temperatures. It
will go out when the exhaust temperature goes below its threshold or
the truck increases speed above speed threshold. For parked
regenerations, the icon is illuminated during the regeneration process.
High Exhaust System Temperature
If the vehicle is in a location that may be hazardous
when regeneration begins (i.e., in close proximity to
flammable materials or gases, inside tunnels, parked
under flammable objects, etc.), the regeneration
should be stopped.
If regeneration is stopped by the vehicle operator, it
must be initiated at a later time when the vehicle is in a
safe location. Regenerations that are stopped and
never restarted at a later time, however, will require
that the vehicle be taken to an authorized Volvo Truck
dealer to have the regeneration manually started with
special service tools.
399
vn-vhd.bk Page 400 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The Aftertreatment menu in the Drive Information Display (DID) has
three submenus: request parked DPF Regeneration, check
Aftertreatment status and cancel DPF regeneration.
400
vn-vhd.bk Page 401 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
To disable automatic regeneration, scroll to the Aftertreatment menu in
the DID, select “Cancel REGEN” and select “Disable REGEN”. When
automatic regeneration is disabled, the letters ATS with an X through
them will be displayed in the DID. It is important to enable regeneration
as soon as possible by scrolling to the Aftertreatment menu, selecting
“Cancel REGEN” and selecting “Enable REGEN”.
It is important to enable regeneration as soon as
possible to avoid engine problems. Long term engine
operation with regeneration disabled will result in a
loss of engine performance including horsepower,
torque, speed and temperature derates. Also, the DPF
filter will become overloaded with soot and require
service at an authorized Volvo dealer.
401
vn-vhd.bk Page 402 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
The regeneration process can be stopped at any time by turning the
ignition key to OFF, or, scrolling to the Aftertreatment menu in the Drive
Information Display (DID) and selecting “Cancel REGEN”, or by
pressing Enter on the stalk switch.
If regeneration occurs during vehicle operation, idle
speed may increase when the vehicle is stopped at a
traffic light to maintain proper regeneration conditions.
If the DPF Regeneration Required icon is flashing, the diesel
particulate filter is full. Maintain uninterrupted highway speed for an
automatic regeneration or the vehicles should be moved to a safe
location, stopped and the parked regeneration process should be
initiated.
402
vn-vhd.bk Page 403 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If the DPF Regeneration Required icon is flashing and the CHECK light
illuminates, the diesel particulate filter is overfull. Engine performance
will be limited. To avoid further engine derate, the vehicle must be
immediately moved to a safe location, stopped and the parked
regeneration process must be initiated, or take the vehicle to an
authorized Volvo Trucks dealer.
If the DPF Regeneration Required icon is flashing and the STOP light
illuminates, a serious engine problem has occurred. The diesel
particulate filter may be over its maximum capacity and the engine may
shut down. The vehicle must be taken to an authorized Volvo Truck
dealer immediately for service.
Regeneration cannot be initiated if it is not required. The following
conditions must be met for a parked regeneration:
앫
“Manual or Parked Regeneration required” message displayed
앫
Parking brake on and transmission in neutral
앫
Minimum 10 volts battery charge
앫
Engine running
앫
Accelerator and clutch pedal released
앫
PTO not active
403
vn-vhd.bk Page 404 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
If a request for manual regeneration fails, “REGEN Failed Check Menu
Status” is displayed. Scroll to the Aftertreatment menu in the Drive
Information Display (DID) and select “ATS Status” to determine why the
regeneration failed.
For chassis equipped with a heated-dump body,
be aware the temperature around the area where
the exhaust enters the body as well as the product
contained in the body, may be elevated,
particularly during DPF regeneration.
404
vn-vhd.bk Page 405 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Aftertreatment System Status
The Aftertreatment status submenus provide information about the
conditions required for performing a regeneration. The status can be
OK (regeneration allowed), CHECK (regeneration not allowed) or N/A
(not applicable). When ATS Status is selected, the following submenus
are available.
To perform a parked regeneration, the park brake must be engaged
and there can be no active fault codes. The system will time-out if the
duty cycle is inadequate to support an automatic regeneration or if
there is a problem that is preventing regeneration. Attempt to perform a
parked regeneration or take the vehicle to a Volvo Truck dealer for a
service regeneration.
405
vn-vhd.bk Page 406 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
To perform a parked regeneration, the clutch pedal must not be
depressed, the service brake must not be engaged and a PTO must
not be engaged or the PTO must be able to operate above the
minimum engine speed required.
Temporary lockout prevents performing a regeneration when a
regeneration is not needed. Permanent lockout prevents performing a
regeneration when a condition exists that requires vehicle service.
Take the vehicle to a Volvo Truck dealer. A minimum engine
temperature of 35°C (95°F) is required for regeneration.
406
vn-vhd.bk Page 407 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
To perform a parked regeneration, the accelerator pedal must not be
depressed, the transmission must be in the neutral position and the
vehicle speed must not be above zero.
A minimum exhaust temperature of 250°C (482°F) is required for
regeneration. The minimum vehicle speed for an automatic
regeneration is 40 km/h (25 mph). When Disable REGEN is selected in
the Cancel REGEN submenu, regeneration is inhibited. Select Enable
REGEN to allow regeneration.
407
vn-vhd.bk Page 408 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Refer to the Emission System Instructions sun visor label for additional
DPF information. For additional information about the Aftertreatment
menu, refer to the Driver Information Display manual.
408
vn-vhd.bk Page 409 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
OPERATION
Extended Idling and Aftertreatment System Conditioning
(Periodic Heat Mode)
Extended idling performed on this vehicle equipped with an exhaust
aftertreatment system should be carried out at a low engine idle speed.
There is no benefit to using a raised engine idle speed for extended
idling. The only exception is for active PTO operation. Utilizing an
engine speed above 1300rpm is recommended for vehicles which
perform extended idling with an active PTO.
During periods of extended idling, normally greater than 8hrs, the
catalyzed DPF system needs to perform a routine conditioning cycle.
The conditioning cycle is controlled by the Engine ECU and will start
and stop automatically as needed. The ATS conditioning is required to
maintain normal exhaust aftertreatment system function and should
not be stopped. ATS conditioning will not occur on non-catalyzed DPF
systems.
During these events the engine speed will increase to approximately
1050–1400rpm, for non-PTO operation, in order to complete the
exhaust aftertreatment conditioning cycle. Exhaust temperatures will
also elevate slightly but remain much lower than those reached during
regeneration and present no danger.
If a compatible driver display is available a message will be displayed
when the conditioning cycle is in progress. The message indicated in
the driver’s display will be “ATS Conditioning in Progress, No Action
Required.” If no driver display is available there will be no indication of
an ATS conditioning event except for the automatic increase in engine
speed.
IF ATS conditioning is unsuccessful and extended idling is continued a
yellow lamp will be displayed. If this fault occurs extended idling should
be stopped and driving resumed as soon as possible. If a yellow lamp
is active and idling is continued a red lamp will be displayed and finally
an engine shutdown. In the event that a red lamp is reached during
extended idling the vheicle should be serviced to diagnose the problem
in the aftertreatment system and inspect the DPF system for damage.
Aftertreatment system hardware problems, driver intervention, and
certain PTO operations could cause an ATS conditioning to fail.
409
vn-vhd.bk Page 410 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
NOTES
410
vn-vhd.bk Page 411 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
TOWING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
POWER STEERING, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
FUELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
CAB AIR FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
HEADLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
ROOF EXTENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
FRONT BUMPER/LICENSE PLATE
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
MODIFICATIONS TO VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
411
vn-vhd.bk Page 412 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
DAILY MAINTENANCE
Before working on or inspecting a vehicle, set the
parking brakes, place the transmission in neutral
and block the wheels. Failure to do so can result in
unexpected vehicle movement and can cause
serious personal injury or death.
Engines equipped with automatic start systems can
start automatically. An alarm sounds before automatic
start. Failure to turn off ignition before working on fan
or belts can result in personal injury.
Make sure that all fluid levels are at their proper levels.
If the fluids are not at their proper levels, add as
necessary. Refer to the Operator's Manual Vehicle
Maintenance for information on what types of fluids
are recommended for your Volvo vehicle.
Keep yourself clear of all moving or hot engine
parts. A hot engine can cause serious burns.
While checking the fluid levels, visually inspect hoses, pipes and their
connections for signs of leakage. Inspect the ground under the engine,
transmission and rear axle(s) for signs of leakage.
412
vn-vhd.bk Page 413 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
TOWING PROCEDURE
General
If a vehicle with air suspension is lifted by the rear
frame member, there is a risk that the air springs
will separate from the spring plates. When towing
has been completed, DO NOT under any
circumstances use your hands to reposition the
air springs. There is a great risk that your hand will
be caught between spring and plate causing
personal injury.
DO NOT tow a vehicle backwards when equipped
with roof air fairings. The fairings act as an air
scoop and may break off. Failure to follow this
warning may lead to personal injury and vehicle
damage.
Vehicles with air fairings are tall. Make sure that
the total height of the vehicle, when it is raised up
behind the wrecker, does not exceed the maximum
allowed height for local underpasses. Failure to
follow this instruction may lead to personal injury
and vehicle damage.
413
vn-vhd.bk Page 414 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Failure to disconnect the driveshaft, remove the drive
axle shaft(s) or lift the drive wheels off the ground
before towing or pushing the vehicle, can cause
serious transmission damage.
Remove the driveshaft from the rear axle before moving the vehicle,
unless it only needs to be moved a small distance for safety reasons.
When the transmission is driven from the rear wheels without the
engine running, there is no lubrication in the transmission.
Axle shafts must be removed if the vehicle is to be towed at speeds
over 40 km/h (25 mph) or for a long distance. Openings should be
covered to prevent loss of oil and entry of dirt and grit. Where
oil-lubricated bearings are used, openings should be thoroughly sealed
with metal discs and new gaskets before towing.
If the vehicle is towed with the drive wheels still in contact with the road
surface, the vehicle axle shafts or driveline must be removed or
disconnected.
414
vn-vhd.bk Page 415 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
The vehicle may now be towed. It is recommended that a wrecker with
a lift bar is used since the service brakes will not function. The system
must be filled with air to release the parking brake or follow the
mechanical spring brake caging procedures on “Caging Spring Brake
Chambers” on page 422.
The power steering does not function when towing a
vehicle with a disabled engine.
415
vn-vhd.bk Page 416 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Towing Instructions
DO NOT use the tow eyes for raising the front of
the vehicle; the tow eyes can break. DO NOT crawl
under a vehicle suspended by tow eyes. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in serious
personal injury or death.
DO NOT lift or tow vehicle as shown in this illustration.
416
vn-vhd.bk Page 417 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
If the vehicle becomes disabled, it is very important to
tow it properly. Failure to do so can cause damage to
the frame and body parts. Follow the instructions
below to avoid damage.
In the event that the vehicle cannot be reached to place the wrecker lift
bar under the front axle, use the optional tow eyes. The front tow eyes
are used as a point at the front of the vehicle where the vehicle can be
pulled.
On day cab models, the tow eyes are stored bolted to the back of the
cab wall.
On sleeper cab models, the tow eyes are stored bolted to the back wall
of the luggage compartment wall.
417
vn-vhd.bk Page 418 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
The tow eyes are held in place when mounted on the front of the
vehicle by tractor pins. These pins are stored in the tow eye mounting
holes when not being used.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional rock guard installed, insert
the lock pin into the tow hook from the opposite side during installation.
418
vn-vhd.bk Page 419 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional rock/stone guard installed,
the driver will have to insert the lock pin into the tow hook from the
opposite side during installation.
When the vehicle is located properly, lift the front and locate the lift bar
under the front axle and secure. Using the front axle for towing
minimizes the possibility for damage to the vehicle body, frame and
suspension.
419
vn-vhd.bk Page 420 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
When the driveshaft or axle shafts are reinstalled,
make sure the nuts are tightened to the correct
torques. Also make sure the axle shafts are installed in
the proper sides, with the left shaft in the left side and
the right shaft in the right side.
Towing Pintle
DO NOT exceed the maximum towing capacity of
the pintle hook system (4,000 lb.). Exceeding the
maximum towing capacity may result in vehicle
accident, serious injury or death.
If your vehicle is equipped with a pintle hook system
installed by Volvo Trucks North America, please note
that the entire pintle hook system — including the
frame and attachment to the frame — is rated at a
maximum capacity of 4,000 lb.
420
vn-vhd.bk Page 421 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Pintle Hook Advisory Label
Acceptable loads per hook:
앫
Straight pull: Less than or equal to 18 143 kg/hook (40,000 lb).
앫
Vertical pull: Less than or equal to 5 170 kg/hook (11,400 lb).
앫
45° cone (combination loads): Less than or equal to 7239 kg
(15,960 lb).
421
vn-vhd.bk Page 422 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Caging Spring Brake Chambers
Always start by chocking the wheels to prevent the
vehicle from rolling. Failure to do so can result in
unexpected vehicle movement and serious
personal injury or death can occur.
DO NOT attempt in any way to disassemble or
tamper with the spring brake chamber. If the force
stored on the spring is suddenly released, it can
cause serious personal injury or death.
The parking spring brake chambers may be released mechanically if
there is no compressed air available.
Remove the plastic plug in the front end of the chamber. Remove the
screw from the holder in the side of the brake chamber. Insert the
screw into the front hole and push in until it bottoms. Screw into the
cylinder so at least 4 to 6 threads have entered.
Install the washer and nut. Tighten the nut. This compresses the brake
chamber spring and releases the parking brake.
422
vn-vhd.bk Page 423 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Towing Procedure — AIRTEK® Suspension
®HENDRICKSON
recommends that a vehicle equipped with a
STEERTEK axle be towed using the following methods for ON
HIGHWAY or ON ROADWAY applications. Methods listed are in order
of preference.
1.
Wheel lift method, the ideal towing procedure
2.
Axle fork method
3.
Towing vehicle from the rear method
4.
Spring eye and hanger lift method
®HENDRICKSON
is not responsible for any damage to the axle,
suspension or other vehicle components resulting from any towing
method or fixture not authorized by ®HENDRICKSON.
423
vn-vhd.bk Page 424 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Please contact ®HENDRICKSON Tech. Services with any questions
regarding proper towing procedures for vehicles equipped with a
STEERTEK axle.
Wheel Lift Method
This method provides the greatest ease for towing the vehicle. Lifting at
the tires helps reduce the risk of possible damage to the axle,
suspension, and engine components during towing operations. See
illustration.
424
vn-vhd.bk Page 425 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Axle Fork Lift Method
DO NOT tow the vehicle from the axle. Towing the
vehicle by the axle will cause scarring and resultant
damage to the axle and void warranty.
When lifting a vehicle with an under lift boom, care
must be taken not to damage the engine's oil pan. It
may also be necessary to remove the front fairing.
This is an alternative method for towing the vehicle, but it requires
SPECIAL forks (see illustration showing designated lift points). The
following procedure must be used:
앫
Place a block of wood on top of the boom and lift the vehicle in
order to place spacers under tires. This will provide sufficient
room under the axle to locate forks in the proper position.
앫
Install the fork in the boom properly with the angled arm of the
fork facing forward.
앫
Position the forks directly under the center of the bottom axle
wraps, and lift vehicle. The indentions in the center of the wrap
will locate the forks and maintain their position.
앫
When securing the vehicle to the boom, use (preferably) nylon
safety straps. Chains have a tendency to bind and may cause
damage to the axle.
425
vn-vhd.bk Page 426 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Towing Vehicle From Rear Method
This method is preferred when the proper equipment is not available to
perform the wheel lift method or the axle fork method, and is necessary
for wreckers not equipped with an under lift system.
Spring Eye and Hanger Lift Method
This method is permitted for under lift equipped units. Caution must be
taken not to damage the leaf spring (see illustration for proper
installation).
앫
Inspect the ends of the spring cradles for burrs or sharp edges
that could damage spring.
앫
When securing the vehicle to the boom, use (preferably) nylon
safety straps. Chains have a tendency to bind and may cause
damage to the axle.
When lifting a vehicle with the under lift boom (see
illustration) care must be taken not to damage the
engine oil pan. It may be necessary to remove front
fairing. If necessary, place a block of wood between
the top of the boom and the bottom of the axle.
426
vn-vhd.bk Page 427 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
427
vn-vhd.bk Page 428 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Off Roadway Towing Method
When a truck is disabled and equipped with a
STEERTEK axle, care must be taken to ensure
there is no damage to the suspension when
towing the vehicle.
The use of a tow strap is necessary to tow a
disabled truck into a repair facility. The tow straps
should be connected to the tow hooks provided by
the manufacturer at the front of the bumper. If the
use of tow hooks is not an option, then a tow strap
may be wrapped around the front axle (see
illustration) in a manner that is acceptable for
towing the vehicle into the shop.
DO NOT use a tow chain around the front axle to
tow the vehicle. Doing so will damage the axle and
void warranty. See illustration.
428
vn-vhd.bk Page 429 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
THE FOLLOWING METHODS IN THESE ILLUSTRATIONS ARE
NOT RECOMMENDED FOR ON HIGHWAY TOWING
Nylon straps are acceptable for only Off roadway towing.
429
vn-vhd.bk Page 430 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Chains are not acceptable for Off roadway towing.
430
vn-vhd.bk Page 431 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK
Make sure the oil added is the same type of oil that is
in the engine. The wrong type of oil could accelerate
wear on engine if not suited for application.
Check the oil level in the engine with the dipstick. The oil level should
be between the minimum and maximum marks on the dipstick DO NOT
overfill!
To add oil to the engine, remove cap from right-side oil fill and fill
through the hole. See the Operator’s Manual Vehicle Maintenance for
correct types of oil used in Volvo engines.
1. Oil Fill
2. Dipstick
3. Power Steering Fluid
Reservoir
431
vn-vhd.bk Page 432 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Clutch Fluid Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch fluid reservoir. The fluid level should
be between the level marks on the reservoir. If fluid needs to be added,
use brake fluid, DOT 4.
1. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2. Windshield Washer Fluid Fill
432
3. Brake Valve
vn-vhd.bk Page 433 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
POWER STEERING, GENERAL
The VN power steering consists of an integrated gear. The VHD
vehicle has both the integrated gear and the hydraulic power cylinder.
There is also a power steering pump with fluid container. The pump,
driven by the engine, provides hydraulic pressure to the power
steering. If the engine is not working, the steering is only manual. With
the power steering not working, the effort required to turn the steering
wheel is much greater than with power assist. If the power steering
assist fails, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. DO NOT drive the vehicle
until correcting the cause of the problem.
While operating the vehicle, avoid ruts and obstructions which cause
binding condition on the sides of the front wheels. Drive the vehicle out
of the rut, then turn the steering wheel. If possible, avoid turning the
wheels while the vehicle is at a standstill as this places a considerable
load on the power steering system and front axle.
Periodically check the power steering fluid reservoir and keep it filled to
the proper level with the recommended fluid. See the Operator’s
Manual Vehicle Maintenance for more information.
433
vn-vhd.bk Page 434 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
1. Engine Oil Fill Tube
2. Dipstick
434
3. Power Steering Fluid
Reservoir
vn-vhd.bk Page 435 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Windshield Washer Reservoir
Check level in the windshield washer reservoir. If washer fluid needs to
be added, use a commercially reputable washer fluid that has good
cleaning capability and does not freeze in cold weather.
Windshield Washer Capacity
Model
Reserve
Total Capacity
VN
6.35 liters (1.5 gallons)
13.70 liters (3.26 gallons)
VHD
3.875 liters (0.9 gallons)
8.675 liters (2.06 gallons)
1. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2. Windshield Washer Fluid Fill
3. Brake Valve
435
vn-vhd.bk Page 436 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
VN: An indicator will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID)
screen when there is approximately 6.35 liters (1.5 gallons) remaining
in the reservoir.
VHD: An indicator will appear in the DID screen when there is
approximately 3.875 liters (0.9 gallons) remaining in the reservoir.
This indicator is optional. It can be deleted.
FUELING
DO NOT carry extra fuel containers in the cab. Fuel
containers, full or empty, may leak, explode or give
added fuel to a fire. Failure to follow this
precaution may lead to serious personal injury or
death.
DO NOT smoke while fueling the vehicle. The glow
from the cigar/cigarette can ignite the diesel fuel,
causing an explosion resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
Do not remove the fuel tank cap near an open
flame. Diesel fuel vapors are combustible and can
cause an explosion or fire, resulting in severe
personal injury or death.
436
vn-vhd.bk Page 437 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Diesel-powered engines for heavy-duty trucks built on
or after January 1, 2007 are designed to operate only
with Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel. Improper fuel
use will reduce the efficiency and durability of engines,
permanently damage advanced emissions control
systems, reduce fuel economy and possibly prevent
the vehicles from running at all. Manufacturer
warranties will be voided by improper fuel use.
Additionally, burning Low Sulfur Diesel fuel (instead of
ULSD fuel) in 2007 and later model year
diesel-powered cars, trucks and buses is illegal and
punishable with civil penalties.
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel with a maximum
sulfur content of 15 ppm must be used in order to meet
Euro4 engine emission requirements.
Using otherwise approved diesel fuels with a
maximum sulfur content greater than 500 ppm may
shorten engine life and void the engine warranty.
Air is always present inside the fuel tanks, entering mainly through the
tank ventilation. With the air being heated and cooled, condensation is
formed and water is mixed in the fuel. To avoid condensation when the
vehicle is parked for longer periods, fill the tanks up to 95% of capacity.
Do not fill more than that, as the fuel needs to have room for expansion
during the heat of the day.
For additional information about fuel, refer to the Operator's Manual
Vehicle Maintenance.
437
vn-vhd.bk Page 438 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Level Check
DO NOT remove the cap to the surge tank while
the engine and radiator are still hot and under
pressure. Scalding fluid and/or steam may be
blown out under pressure if the cap is taken off
too soon.
Add only premixed coolant made up of 50% clean
water and 50% antifreeze. See the Operator’s Manual
Vehicle Maintenance for more detailed information.
Check coolant level in the coolant tank. The tank should be full. Add
coolant as necessary.
1. Fill Cap
438
vn-vhd.bk Page 439 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
CAB AIR FILTERS
Air going into the cab passes a filter located on the right, front side of
the cab. Remove the filter and check it every 19,200 km (12,000 miles).
The filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace with a new filter
as necessary. Change the filter more often if driving in dusty
conditions. A clogged filter decreases the efficiency of the air
conditioning system.
If the vehicle is equipped with a sleeper heater-A/C, there is a filter for
recirculating air. It is located behind the passenger seat on the bunk
support. The filter should be checked after 19,200 km (12,000 miles),
more often in dusty conditions. Replace the filter as necessary.
To inspect or to change the filter, open the luggage storage lid and pull
out the filter.
439
vn-vhd.bk Page 440 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
HEADLIGHTS
Changing Headlight Bulb
To prevent short service life, DO NOT touch the glass
surface of the replacement bulb.
VNM Instructions
The headlight bulb can be accessed from the rear of the headlight
assembly. Raise the hood and remove the cover.
Remove the terminal from the back of the bulb by bending up the lock
tabs and pulling back at the same time. Turn the lock ring
counterclockwise and remove. Pull out the bulb.
VNM
440
vn-vhd.bk Page 441 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Install the bulb and line up with the location tab by turning it and then
push it in until fully seated. Install the lock ring. Push the terminal back
on. Check that the rubber seal is clean and then install cover and snap
the clamps over it.
VNM
441
vn-vhd.bk Page 442 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
VNL Instructions
The headlight bulb can be accessed from the rear of the headlight
assembly. Raise the hood. In early production vehicles, remove the
bulb cover by turning clockwise.
In later production vehicles, the cover can be removed in the normal
counterclockwise direction.
In some cases, the cover seal may stick to the
housing, which makes removal difficult. Use special
tool 85104355 to assist in removal. Contact your
authorized Volvo dealer for the tool.
With the cover removed, grasp the bulb assembly and turn
counterclockwise to remove. Disengage the wiring connector and
remove the bulb from the vehicle.
Engage the wiring harness connector to the replacement bulb
assembly. Install into the headlamp housing. Check the bulb cover seal
and install the bulb cover. Lower the hood and check for proper
headlamp operation.
442
vn-vhd.bk Page 443 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
1. Low Beam Headlight (Cover
Installed)
2. High Beam Headlight (Cover
Removed)
443
vn-vhd.bk Page 444 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
ROOF EXTENDER
The roof extender increases fuel economy. The extender is adjustable
to five positions which are shown in the illustration and in the graphs.
The vehicle is delivered with the extender or deflector lowered or down,
which is the transport position, see A in illustration.
To set the extender to normal riding position, measure points H and G,
then select positions 1 through 5 in the rod as determined by the
adjustment chart.
앫
H = Height from the top of the trailer to the top of the frame rail.
앫
G = Gap or distance from the back of the cab to the trailer.
앫
F = Frame rail height.
444
vn-vhd.bk Page 445 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
For 630 and 670 vehicle models, the frame height
must be measured. See F in illustration. If F measures
266 mm (10-1/2 inches), subtract 17 mm (5/8-inch)
from the value determined for H.
VN Roof Extender Measurements
VN 630/670 Roof Extender Adjustment Chart
445
vn-vhd.bk Page 446 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
VN 780 Roof Extender Adjustment Chart
446
vn-vhd.bk Page 447 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
FRONT BUMPER/LICENSE PLATE MOUNTING
DO NOT cover the opening in the front bumper with a
license plate. Covering this hole will restrict airflow to
the lower portion of the radiator. This can cause the
engine to overheat, which can damage the engine.
When placing the license plate on the vehicle, make sure the opening
in the bumper is not covered.
VN
447
vn-vhd.bk Page 448 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Multiple License Plate Mounting
Install multiple license plates as shown.
VN
448
vn-vhd.bk Page 449 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
VORAD License Plate Mounting
Install multiple license plates as shown.
VN
1. Install license plates below this edge.
449
vn-vhd.bk Page 450 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
MODIFICATIONS TO VEHICLE
Chassis Frame
DO NOT weld on any part of the frame or drill holes
in the top or bottom flanges. Serious structural
damage could occur.
Frame side rails are heat treated. No welding is permitted because this
can result in structural failure. DO NOT drill through either top or
bottom flanges. A warning label is also attached to the frame for
information.
Drilling is permitted in the frame web in accordance with a specified
hole spacing pattern. Consult an authorized Volvo Truck dealer to
obtain approved hole spacing dimensions or refer to the Frame Rail
and Cross Member Service Manual.
450
vn-vhd.bk Page 451 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Frame rail and cross member nuts and bolts should be checked
periodically and tightened to the specified torque if necessary.
Frame Alterations
Under no circumstances can the frame be cut and an extension piece
added to increase the wheelbase. The only alteration allowed is wheel
base shortening, where the only change in the frame rail is a new hole
pattern drilled for the new location of the rear suspension.
Welding in Vehicle
Use only electric welders due to the coating on
material used to build cabs. Oxygen and Acetylene
welding will not bond properly due to coating.
Do not weld anywhere in or on the vehicle before disconnecting
batteries, all electronic control units (ECUs) and instrument cluster.
DO NOT use oxy/acetylene welding to repair cab panels.
451
vn-vhd.bk Page 452 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
WHEELS
General
Due to the size, equipment needed and the procedures used to change
wheels, this should be done through the Volvo Truck dealer. By having
an expert technician perform this procedure, personal injury and
property damage may be avoided.
When replacing the wheel equipment or tires, use the
same size wheels or tires as originally manufactured.
Changing the tire or wheel size will affect brake
performance. If changing tire size, ABS and
speedometer must be recalibrated.
Check Wheel Nuts Torque
Failure to properly tighten the wheel nuts can
result in the breakage of wheel studs and the
subsequent loss of wheels. Loss of vehicle control
and serious personal injury or death can occur.
Check all wheel nuts torque after the first 80 to 160 km (50 to
100 miles) and the first 80 to 160 km (50 to 100 miles) after each tire
service. This applies to both single and dual wheels in connection with
normal service but should be performed at least every six months.
The torque check is particularly important when rims or brake drums
are newly painted. Paint can flake off from these surfaces, causing the
nuts to lose their grip and the wheel to loosen.
See the Operator's Manual Vehicle Maintenance for correct procedures
on tightening the wheel nuts.
452
vn-vhd.bk Page 453 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Inflating Tires
Tires and wheels must be serviced only by a
qualified technician. DO NOT attempt to perform
this work yourself. Inflated tires on wheels contain
compressed air and if suddenly released, do so
with an explosive force. Serious personal injury or
death can occur.
Never bleed the air from hot tires. Increased tire
pressure measured in a hot tire is normal. Lower than
recommended pressures may cause side wall flexing
resulting in increased tire heat. This may cause
premature tire failure.
Always check inflation pressures when the tires are cool, using an
accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the pressures at regular intervals.
If a tire has low air pressure during a mid-trip inspection and the tire is
at operating temperature, have the tire checked and then increase the
air pressure to the recommended pressure identified on the tire.
453
vn-vhd.bk Page 454 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
For specific information and warranty on rims and tires, contact the tire
manufacturer's distributor. Check tires for abnormal wear. Also, check
the tread depth.
Wheel Bearing Adjustment
Failure to keep wheel bearings properly adjusted
may result in accelerated tire wear, poor handling
and, in extreme cases, wheel separation from the
hub or from the spindle. It is important that wheel
bearings are checked and adjusted regularly.
Failure to properly maintain these bearings can
ultimately result in loss of vehicle control and
cause serious personal injury or death.
454
vn-vhd.bk Page 455 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
For reliable operation and adequate service life, the wheel bearings
must be properly adjusted and checked during the service period.
Loose wheel bearings could cause premature tire wear and possibly
affect vehicle handling. See your authorized Volvo Truck dealer for
proper servicing.
Watch carefully for oil leaks and listen for unusual noises. These are
indications of worn bearings, bad seals or misadjusted bearings.
These are problems which must be corrected as soon as possible.
455
vn-vhd.bk Page 456 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
BATTERY
Battery Box Access for Jump Start
When inspecting or cleaning batteries, never
smoke or expose batteries (or the areas around
them) to spark or flames. The battery area may
contain an explosive gas mixture that can ignite,
causing an explosion, leading to serious personal
injury or death.
Always wear eye protection when working around
batteries to prevent the risk of injury due to
contact with sulfuric acid or an explosion.
456
vn-vhd.bk Page 457 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Batteries, Access and Charging
When installing the battery cover, make sure it is
resting properly on the box before fastening the
latches. Faulty installation may cause the cover to
shift when the steps are used, which may lead to a
fall, causing serious personal injury or death.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead compounds, chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
457
vn-vhd.bk Page 458 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
The battery cover may also be a base for the cab steps. To remove the
cover, unhook the two rubber latches and lift the cover up and out. This
applies to the vehicle models without fairings, and the VHD vehicle.
458
vn-vhd.bk Page 459 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
The VHD vehicle has two styles of battery boxes available. One is
covered with a plastic cover, the other cover is made of chromed
diamond plated steel.
There may be up to four batteries installed. Always make sure the
batteries are fastened properly in the box.
When disconnecting battery terminals, always disconnect the engine
ECU fuse(s) first, then the ECU ground wire(s), then the main ground
cable, and finally the main positive cable.
Reverse this order when reconnecting the cables and wires.
459
vn-vhd.bk Page 460 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Battery Jump Starting and Charging
DO NOT attempt to jump-start a vehicle equipped
with Delco Maintenance Free batteries if the test
indicator is light yellow. Replace the battery
instead. Jump-starting may cause battery to
explode causing skin burns from acid or serious
personal injury or death.
Always wear eye protection when working around
batteries to prevent the risk of injury due to
contact with sulfuric acid or an explosion.
To access the batteries on a vehicle equipped with side fairings, open
the fold-out fairing. On the second battery from the front, there are
special, larger brass posts installed to accept jumper cables.
When jumping batteries to start an engine, it is important that the
jumper cables are connected directly from one set of batteries in one
vehicle to the other set of batteries in the other vehicle (unless vehicle
is equipped with optional Emergency Start System). This way the
cranking current is carried through the proper starter wiring.
Make sure the cables are routed under the fairing,
then connected as shown in illustration. Close and
lock the fairing before climbing into the cab.
460
vn-vhd.bk Page 461 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Connect the jumper cables in the following sequence:
앫
Good battery positive,
앫
Dead battery positive,
앫
Dead battery negative,
앫
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.
Avoid creating sparks by making all connections quickly and firmly.
DO NOT permit vehicles to touch each other when jump starting.
461
vn-vhd.bk Page 462 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Battery to Battery Charging
High voltage machines that are used for work on the vehicle can do
damage to the electrical system, especially to its electronic
components. Welding or quick-charging machines subject the wiring to
excessive voltage, which may result in damage to electrical and
electronic components anywhere on the vehicle.
Attempting to work on electronic components without
proper equipment can damage internal parts due to
static electric discharges.
DO NOT work on the electrical system without the proper tools and
training. Repair work to the electrical system must always be done by
trained professionals. Your Volvo Truck dealer has the right tools and
trained technicians.
462
vn-vhd.bk Page 463 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Battery, Low State of Charge
If the batteries are discharged to the point where they do not have
enough stored energy to start the engine, they should be recharged
using a low charge current, not to exceed 14.5 to 15.0 volts.
If the vehicle needs to be started immediately, use a starting batteries
charger.
If the voltage power is exceeded, this can cause
damage to the lighting system and bulbs.
DO NOT use battery chargers with very high “boosting” capability.
These produce a high voltage that may cause damage to the vehicle
electrical and electronic components.
Welding
Welding on the vehicle can damage the electrical
system or components due to the high voltage and
current spikes that normally occur when welding. It is
preferable to avoid welding on an assembled vehicle.
However, if any structure on or in contact with the
vehicle must be welded, follow the recommendations
below.
463
vn-vhd.bk Page 464 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
If there are other ground cables connected to the
battery (such as engine ECU, transmission ECU, etc.),
disconnect those wires in the sequence shown, then
remove the main battery ground cable. Electronic
modules may be damaged when their ground(s) are
connected/disconnected with the main battery ground
disconnected. Therefore, disconnect the main battery
ground last or when installing, connect the main
ground first.
DO NOT weld on the engine or engine components.
Welding on the engine or components mounted on the
engine can cause serious damage to the engine ECU.
Before welding on the vehicle, electrical power needs to be
disconnected and some components must also be disconnected:
Ignition OFF position.
464
vn-vhd.bk Page 465 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
The vehicle is equipped with systems that have their own electronics,
including vehicle ECU (VECU), ABS, air bag (SRS), gauge cluster and
some transmissions. Disconnect each ECU at its electrical connectors.
Disconnect the power harness (engine electronic control unit [EECU])
and vehicle interface harness at the battery.
Disconnect the electrical connections at the negative side of the
battery.
465
vn-vhd.bk Page 466 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Reposition or shield any parts that would be damaged by high
temperatures during welding.
Complete the battery cable removal by removing the positive cable
last.
앫
Attach the welder ground cable as close to the weld area as
possible (6 inches or less from the place being welded).
앫
DO NOT connect the welder ground cable near any electronic
module, such as the EECU or its cooling plate.
앫
Welding cables should not be allowed to lie on, or run parallel
with any wiring.
앫
Welding cables should not be allowed to lie near any electronic
component during welding.
앫
After welding is complete and the welded areas have cooled,
inspect wiring and components for possible shorts, nicks,
abrasion or other damage.
466
vn-vhd.bk Page 467 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Battery Voltage Protection System
An electronic battery monitor in the sleeper control module will monitor
and disconnect certain circuits if it senses that the battery voltage falls
below two different levels.
If the first level is reached, the sleeper control module will sound a
three second alarm and the LED will start blinking. If the battery
voltage is not raised within 30 seconds, the majority of lights in the
sleeper unit will be disabled.
1. LED
2. Fuses
Pressing the fan speed button over rides level one for
approximately 70 seconds, enabling the majority of the
lights in the sleeper area.
467
vn-vhd.bk Page 468 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
If the battery voltage continues to drop and the second level is
reached, the LED blinks at a different rate than the first level. All
remaining sleeper circuits and designated cab circuits will be disabled.
In the second level, pressing the fan speed switch will
override both levels of battery protection, enabling all
circuits that were off.
The clock display will also be turned off, by 5 minute
interval times. This time starts after any key is pressed
and is restarted during any key press.
When the batteries are charged, either through the vehicle alternator or
a connected battery charger, the monitor will automatically restore
power to the disconnected circuits.
Unless the batteries are held at an elevated voltage for several hours,
they will only develop a “surface” charge. That charge will quickly go
away and the system will retrip.
468
vn-vhd.bk Page 469 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Battery Voltage Protection System (Optional)
A Battery Protection Relay (External Relay 8) is added to the fuse and
relay center. This relay will disconnect Power Relay 1, disabling certain
cab circuits in addition to those disabled by the sleeper control panel.
This conserves battery power.
The Sleeper control module will display “Err” (error) if there is a fault
with External Relay 8.
469
vn-vhd.bk Page 470 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
ELECTRICAL
General Safety Guidelines
Failure to repair a malfunction in the electrical
system can result in serious damage due to
vehicle fire. Always let an experienced electrical
technician perform repairs. Always determine the
source of the fault; do not just treat the symptoms.
Always wear eye protection when working around
batteries to prevent the risk of injury due to
contact with sulfuric acid or an explosion.
Before replacing a damaged fuse, turn off all
functions for that circuit. Damage to the circuit can
happen. Always replace fuses and circuit breakers
with the same current/amperage rating. Never
substitute a fuse with foil, wire or nails. Increasing
fuse or circuit breaker ratings or substituting a
fuse with foil, wire or nails may result in electrical
circuit overheating and possibly fire.
Over-charging a poorly charged battery can cause
an explosion, which can lead to serious personal
injury.
470
vn-vhd.bk Page 471 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Attempting to work on electronic components without
proper equipment can damage internal parts with
static electricity.
Today's vehicles contain a high number of electronic
devices. It is very important to exercise caution when
working on a modern electrical system, charging
batteries or jump starting the engine. To minimize the
risk of any damage to the electronic components,
follow the procedures below when work is being done
to the electrical system.
Welding on the vehicle can damage the electrical
system or components due to the high voltage and
current spikes that normally occur when welding. It is
preferable to avoid welding on an assembled vehicle.
However, if any structure on or in contact with the
vehicle must be welded, follow the recommendations
below.
If there are other ground cables connected to the
battery (such as engine ECU, transmission ECU, etc.),
disconnect those wires first, then remove the main
battery ground cable. Electronic modules may be
damaged when their ground(s) are
connected/disconnected with the main battery ground
disconnected. Therefore, disconnect the main battery
ground last or when installing, connect the main
ground first.
471
vn-vhd.bk Page 472 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
DO NOT weld on the engine or engine components.
Welding on the engine or components mounted on the
engine can cause serious damage to the engine ECU.
DO NOT work on the electric system without proper
tools and training. Repair work to the electrical system
must be done by trained professionals. Your
authorized Volvo Truck dealer has the right tools and
trained technicians.
472
vn-vhd.bk Page 473 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Charging System
An alternator with an integrated regulator is used to supply power to
the vehicle electrical system. The charging system voltage should be
checked periodically to prevent overcharging or undercharging the
batteries.
473
vn-vhd.bk Page 474 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Electrical Center
Failure to repair a malfunction in the electrical
system may result in a vehicle fire and personal
injury.
Always replace fuses and circuit breakers with the
same current/amperage rating. Using larger fuse
or circuit breaker ratings may result in electrical
circuit overheating and possibly fire.
The vehicle has an electrical center located in the middle of the dash
under the top cover.
474
vn-vhd.bk Page 475 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
The cover panels are fastened with screws. Most relays and fuses are
accessible from under the top cover. Since the function of some fuses
or relays may change for the vehicle application, refer to the list of
functions that is attached beneath each panel.
475
vn-vhd.bk Page 476 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
VHD Fuse and Relay Center
Additional relays are located in the left-hand luggage compartment,
attached to the sleeper harness.
These relays have limited optional sleeper functions.
476
vn-vhd.bk Page 477 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Additional fuses are located in the LECM.
LECM Fuses
Fuses are standard. Reset breakers are available as an option for
some circuits. If a fuse continues to blow or disconnect, the circuit has
a malfunction and must be repaired.
If a breaker trips, the ignition or main switch must be switched off
before the breaker resets.
One type of fuse in the electrical center is termed “mini-fuse.” DO NOT
use needle-nose pliers to remove fuses.
477
vn-vhd.bk Page 478 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
CB Power Studs
CB Studs are available either in the overhead storage compartment, or
on the dash.
The red stud is the positive terminal and the black stud is the ground
terminal.
For a proper hook-up, use fork-type connectors on the wires or use
“banana” plugs.
If stripped wire ends are used, make sure there are no
wire strands that can bridge between the studs.
478
vn-vhd.bk Page 479 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
Before connecting any electrical accessory, make sure it is made for 12
V operation. This circuit is fused at 20 A maximum, or optional circuits
are fused at higher amps (30 A). DO NOT overload this circuit.
DO NOT connect a device with a current rating in
excess of the amount specified on the fuse and relay
panels.
The dash top tray or the overhead radio shelf is available with an
optional CB mount power strap to hold different size radios securely in
place.
479
vn-vhd.bk Page 480 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
NOTES
480
vn-vhd.bk Page 481 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
METRIC CONVERSIONS
METRIC CONVERSIONS
Use all tools on the fasteners they were made to be
used on. Use metric tools on Sl metric units only.
Never try to use metric tools on U.S. standard
fasteners or U.S. standard tools on Sl metric units.
481
vn-vhd.bk Page 482 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
METRIC CONVERSIONS
SI to U.S. Conversions
25.4 millimeters
=
1 inch
1.61 kilometers
=
1 mile
.473 liter
=
1 pint (U.S. liquid)
.946 liter
=
1 quart (U.S. liquid)
.01639 liter
=
1 cubic inch
1.3558 Newton meters
=
1 pound-foot
.746 kilowatt
=
1 horsepower
6.895 kilopascals
=
1 pound/square inch
(1.8 x degrees Celsius) + 32
=
degrees Fahrenheit
.83267 Imperial gallon
=
1 gallon (U.S. liquid)
U.S. to SI Conversions
.03937 inch
=
1 millimeter
.6214 mile
=
1 kilometer
2.1134 pints (U.S. liquid)
=
1 liter
1.0567 quarts (U.S. liquid)
=
1 liter
61.024 cubic inches
=
1 liter
.7376 pound-foot
=
1 Newton meter
1.34 horsepower
=
1 kilowatt
.145 pound/square inch
=
1 kilopascal
.556 x (degrees Fahrenheit −32)
=
degrees Celsius
1.2009 gallons (U.S. liquid)
=
1 Imperial gallon
482
vn-vhd.bk Page 483 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
A
ACCELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ADVISORY LABEL DEFINITIONS (IN HANDBOOK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ADVISORY LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONIC CLIMATE
CONTROL (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
AIR CONDITIONING MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (MCC) . . . . 123
AIR TANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
AIR TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
ANTENNA MULTIPLEXER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ANTENNAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
APPLICATION AIR PRESSURE GAUGE (HIGH LEVEL
CLUSTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
APPROACHING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
AUXILIARY LIFT AXLE VHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
AVOID HIGH ENGINE SPEEDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 389
B
BATTERIES, ACCESS AND CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
BATTERY BOX ACCESS FOR JUMP START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
BATTERY JUMP STARTING AND CHARGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
BATTERY TO BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
BATTERY VOLTAGE PROTECTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
BATTERY VOLTAGE PROTECTION SYSTEM (OPTIONAL) . . . . 469
BATTERY, LOW STATE OF CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
BEFORE LEAVING THE PARKING AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
BEHIND THE CAB ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
BOSTROM COMFORT SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
BOSTROM SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
BOSTROM STANDARD SEAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
BOSTROM TOOLBOX SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
BRAKE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
483
vn-vhd.bk Page 484 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
BRAKE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKE SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUILD SPECIFICATION AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
318
304
302
C
CAB AIR FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
CAB DOORS AND DOOR LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
CAB ENTRY AND EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CAB INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
CAB VENTILATION, SLEEPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
CAGING SPRING BRAKE CHAMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
CAN THE AIRBAG BE DEPLOYED ACCIDENTALLY? . . . . . . . . . 287
CANADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CATALYZED DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERS (DPF)
(IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
CB POWER STUDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
CB RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CENTRAL LOCKING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
CERTIFICATION LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
CHANGING HEADLIGHT BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
CHARGING AIR TO ANOTHER VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
CHASSIS FAIRING/STEPS OPEN AND LOCKED
POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
CHASSIS FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
CHECK WHEEL NUTS TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
CIGAR LIGHTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
CLEAN IDLE ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
CLOSE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
CLOSING AND LOCKING FAIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
CLOSING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
CLUTCH FLUID CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
COLD WEATHER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347, 349
COLORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
COMFORT CLIP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
484
vn-vhd.bk Page 485 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
COMPONENT LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CONTROL AWARENESS FEATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
COOL AND HOT TEMPERATURE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
CUMMINS ISX INTEBRAKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
CUP HOLDERS AND TRASH COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
CURTAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
D
DAILY MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
DASH SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERS (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
DISENGAGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
DO NOT OVERLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DOWNHILL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
DRIVELINE COMBINATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
DRIVER SIDE ENTRY/EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DRIVING HABITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
DRIVING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
E
ECC AIR DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
ELECTRICAL CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
EMISSIONS CONTROL COMPLIANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ENGAGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
ENGINE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ENGINE BREAK-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
485
vn-vhd.bk Page 486 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
ENGINE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
ENGINE OVERSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
ENGINE SHUT-DOWN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
ENGINE-MOUNTED PTO VN, VHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
ENGINES WITHOUT PREHEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
ENTERING SLEEPER FROM SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ETHER START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
EVENT DATA RECORDING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
EXHAUST PYROMETER GAUGE (HIGH LEVEL
CLUSTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
EXTENDED IDLING AND AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM
CONDITIONING (PERIODIC HEAT MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
EXTERNAL ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
F
FAN SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
FIFTH WHEEL GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
FIFTH WHEEL INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
FIFTH WHEEL SLIDER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
FOG AND DRIVING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
FOOT BRAKE VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
FOR TRACTORS WITH AIR RIDE SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
FOR TRACTORS WITHOUT AIR RIDE SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . 375
FRAME ALTERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
FRESH AIR VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
FRESH WATER TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
FRONT AND REAR BRAKE SYSTEM AIR PRESSURE
GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
FRONT BUMPER/LICENSE PLATE MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
FRONT ENGINE-MOUNTED PTO VHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
FRONT OVERHEAD STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
FUEL ECONOMY DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
FUEL HEATER FILTER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
FUEL PARKING HEATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
FUEL TANK HEATER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
FUELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
486
vn-vhd.bk Page 487 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
G
GENERAL . . . . . . . .42, 176, 195, 254, 297, 302, 314, 382, 413, 452
GENERAL ENTRY GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
GRADIENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
H
HEADLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEADWINDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEART OF THE VOLVO SAFETY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEATED REAR VIEW MIRRORS (OPTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIGH ALTITUDE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HILL DRIVING TECHNIQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOOD LATCH (OPTIONAL) VNM 200 DAY CAB, SHORT
FAIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOOD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOOKING UP TO TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORN SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
440
305
287
253
344
306
241
236
230
151
I
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
IDLE SHUTDOWN TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
IDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
IMMOBILIZER FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
IMPORTANT FACTS ABOUT SAFETY BELTS IN HEAVY
TRUCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
IN THE CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
INFLATING TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
INFORMATION FOR THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
INSTRUMENT PANEL GAUGE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
487
vn-vhd.bk Page 488 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
INTAKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE GAUGE (HIGH LEVEL
CLUSTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
INVERTER SWITCH — 12 V DC TO 120 V AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
L
LEFT-HAND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIGHT CONTROL PANEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK DOORS USING REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOW IDLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
128
252
341
246
M
MAXIMUM COLD SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
MAXIMUM HEAT SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
MCC AIR DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
MEXICO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
MIDDLE AND LOWER TELL-TALES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MISCELLANEOUS CAB EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
MIST AND ICE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 124
MODIFICATIONS TO VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
MULTIBAND ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
MULTIPLE LICENSE PLATE MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
N
NATIONAL BENCH SEAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
NATIONAL COMFORT SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
NATIONAL STANDARD SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
NATIONAL TOOLBOX SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
NO PASSENGER SEAT (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
NOISE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
NOISE EMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NON-DRIVING MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
NORMAL SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
488
vn-vhd.bk Page 489 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
O
OIL PAN HEATER (OPTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
OPEN WINDOW (AUTO-DOWN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
OPENING FAIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
OPENING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
OPERATING IN BOBTAIL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
OPERATING THE FIFTH WHEEL SLIDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
OPERATING THE SAFETY BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
OPERATING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
P
PANEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PANEL ARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PANEL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PANEL C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PANEL D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
PANEL E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PARKING BRAKE/TRAILER SUPPLY VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
PARKING HEATER (OPTIONAL, SLEEPER
MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
PASSENGER SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
PASSENGER SIDE ENTRY/EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
PERFORMANCE BONUS FEATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
PERFORMANCE BONUS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
PERFORMANCE BONUS STATUS REWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
POWER DOOR LOCKS (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
POWER REAR VIEW MIRRORS (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
POWER STEERING, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
POWER WINDOWS (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
PRE-TRIP INSPECTION AND DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . 220
PRE-TRIP INSPECTION QUICK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
PTO SPEED ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
489
vn-vhd.bk Page 490 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
R
RAIN, SNOW AND ROAD SURFACE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
RECIRCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 124
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
RESUMING VEHICLE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
RIGHT-HAND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ROAD RELAY (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
ROLLING BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
ROOF EXTENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
S
SAFETY BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
SAFETY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
SAFETY RESTRAINT VN 430, VN 630, VN 670
AND VHD 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
SAFETY RESTRAINT VN 730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SAFETY RESTRAINT VN 780 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
SEAT ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 290
SEATS, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
SECURING THE FAIRING/STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
SERVICE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SERVICE LITERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SETTING ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SETTING DISPLAY TIME/CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
SETTING PARKING HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
SETTING TIMER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
SLEEPER BUNKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SLEEPER CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SLEEPER CLIMATE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
SLEEPER COMPARTMENT SINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
SLEEPER CONTROL PANEL (SLEEPER MODELS ONLY) . . . . . 131
SLEEPER CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
SLEEPER SAFETY RESTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SPEEDOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SPRING BRAKE FOR PARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
SRS AIRBAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
SRS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
490
vn-vhd.bk Page 491 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
STANDARD GEAR LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
START PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 336
STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
STOPPING THE ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
T
TACHOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
TELEPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
TELEVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
TELL-TALES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SETTINGS ECC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SETTINGS MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
THE “121” BRAKE STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
TOWING PINTLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
TOWING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
TOWING PROCEDURE — AIRTEK® SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . 423
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . 331
TRAILER BRAKE HAND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
TRAILER COUPLING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
TRAILER UNCOUPLING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
TRANSMISSION RETARDER, VHD ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
TRANSMISSION-MOUNTED PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
TV ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
U
UNITED STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
UNLOCK DOORS USING REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
UNLOCKING THE FIFTH WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
UPHILL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
UPPER BUNK ACCESS VN 780 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
UPPER TELL-TALES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
491
vn-vhd.bk Page 492 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
V
VEHICLE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
VEHICLE ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
VEHICLE SPEED RETARDING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VHD VEHICLES AND VOLVO ENGINES ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
VN 430 AND VHD 430 SLEEPER BUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
VN 670. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
VN 670 OPTIONAL FOLD DOWN STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
VN 670, 630 42-INCH SLEEPER BUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
VN 670, 630, 430 AND VHD 430 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
VN 780 BUNK STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
VN 780 SLEEPER UPPER BUNK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
VN 780 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
VN 780, VNL 730, VN 670 OFFICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
VNL 730 BUNK STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
VNL 730 SLEEPER BUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
VNL 730 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
VNL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
VNM INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
VOLTMETER GAUGE (BASIC LEVEL CLUSTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . 77
VOLVO ENGINE BRAKE (I-VEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
VOLVO ENGINE BRAKE I-VEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
VOLVO ENGINE COLD START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VOLVO ENGINES ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
VOLVO ENHANCED STABILITY TECHNOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
VOLVO VARIABLE GEOMETRY TURBO BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VOLVO VARIABLE GEOMETRY TURBO BRAKE VN, VHD . . . . . 115
VORAD LICENSE PLATE MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
VORAD® COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
492
vn-vhd.bk Page 493 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
INDEX
W
WARNING LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
WARNING TRIANGLES, DAY CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
WASTE WATER TANK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
WELDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
WELDING IN VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
WHEEL BEARING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
WHEN IS THE AIRBAG DEPLOYED? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
WHEN IS THE AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
WINTERFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
493
vn-vhd.bk Page 494 Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:44 AM
NOTES
494
VN,VHDcover.fm Page v Tuesday, July 1, 2008 9:46 AM
VHD, VN
BackCycler is a registered trademark of Backcycler, LLC.
Eaton VORAD Collision Warning System is a registered trademark of
Dana Corporation.
Hendrickson and AIRTEK are registered trademarks of Hendrickson
USA, LLC.
1-800-52-VOLVO
Volvo Action Service (VAS)
Support Center
If you need assistance on the road or if you need
service repairs, contact the VAS support center.
VAS is available 24 hours per day, 7 days per
week at 1-800-528-6586.
Please report the specific nature of the service
problem to the Volvo Customer Support
Specialist, who will answer your questions and
arrange for the assistance you need.
Truck Model & Serial
Engine Model & Serial
Transmission Model & Serial
Rear Axle Model & Serial
Your Truck Was Delivered By:
Volvo Trucks North America
P.O. Box 26115 Greensboro, NC 27402-6115
Volvo Trucks Canada, Ltd.
5600A Cancross Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 3E9
http://www.volvotrucks.volvo.com
PV776-21012009 07.2008 © Volvo Group North America, Inc. 2008. All Rights Reserved.